Computerised Conceret Design by Engr. Ben David PDF

SYSTEMATIC DESIGN
OF
REINFORCED CONCRETE STRUCTURES
By Microcomputer
Ma1 Mb1 Mc1 10 REM A three dim array
Ma2 Mb2 Mc2 20 DIM M(3,3,3) Computer Output
Ma3 Mb3 Mc3 30 FOR a = 1 to 5
Ma4 Mb4 Mc4 40 FOR b = 1 to 5
Ma5 Mb5 Mc5 50 FOR c = 1 to 5
Matrix Algebra Advance Basica
By:Bienvenido C. David – Civil Engineer

The cover page of the book is
our UC – BCF Alumni building
located in Harrison Road. The
cover design suggest that a
portion of our alumni building
have been designed using a
micro computer by Matrix
Method of Structural Analysis
and the software language
used is Advanced Basica.
In a construction project a field engineer and his men are busy excavating the last footing of a
building. The depth of the footing as per plan is 12 Inches. They are half way when
unexpectedly they encountered a big boulder. Removing the boulder is costly and time
consuming it’s on site decision no time to lose the only alternative the field engineer is to
revise the dimensions of the footing. The field engineer had only his programmable
calculator. His problem what dimensions the footing be with the depth reduce to 6 inches?
He has no tables or charts and worst of all he forgot his theory of “Reinforced Concrete”
Time is running out in four hours’ time pouring of concrete will start. Since design is both
safety and economy there should be logical reasons for the new dimensions. Luckily the field
engineer remembers when he was reviewing for his Civil board exams he made a program
called “Square foot” and save it in his programmable calculator (Square foot is a program
used to design a square footing using the ultimate strength theory. Given the depth of the
footing it solves the dimensions, size of rebar and spacing and vice versa). Break time and the
engineer got his programmable calculator retrieved the file “Square footing” and in five
seconds his programmable calculator gives all the information (Dimensions rebar size and
spacing). Without the program the outcome would have been different. The program
“Square footing” saves the engineer that day. The structure had been completed ahead
of schedule as a reward for his judgment and performance the boss promoted the engineer to
Team Leader with a cash bonus in return the good Samaritan engineer donated one
third of his bonus to the BCF-UC alumni for the two incoming projects Speech
lab and E-Review center the other one third he donated it to the recent typhoon
victims in his home country and the remaining third he reserve it for his second
honeymoon.
Promoted to team leader the engineer went home happily and that night having
missed his wife for a long time he started singing “Wash now my love” and in
return he heard his wife sings “What I am washing for it’s not for you” and
moments later the light was turned off.
About the author
The author finished his Bachelor of Science in Civil Engineering in the

University Of Cordilleras year 1969 and passed the Civil Engineering Board
Year 1969. Year 1970 he was employed by Monark International as Instrument

man/Surveyor the work includes the construction of a 6 kilometers highway
with a 1 kilometer airport construction in Sison, Pangasinan. Late 1971
He worked in the Pantabangan Dam Multipurpose project, a special project of
the National Irrigation Administration first as Assistant Construction Engineer
and later promoted to Construction Engineer year 1972 to 1977. In this project
he held positions such as Field Inspector, Field Reporting Engineer and Cost
Engineer.In 1977 when the project was finished he worked as a Feasibility study
Engineer under the office of his uncle then the city administrator of Baguio City
where he designed the Civil Infrastructure component of the proposed project.
In 1980
He ventured into Civil Engineering practice in his hometown Baguio City year
1980 to 1987. During his early years of practice the conventional method of
Designing Reinforced Concrete Structures is inadequate enough to meet the
schedules of his project
This prompted him to write his book “Systematic Design of Reinforced

Concrete Structures by Micro computer”
In 1988 He migrated to Australia and worked in the Work Cover Authority of

New South Wales from 1988 to 2000 and different private telecommunication
companies namely SIM PLUS, RSL, VIRGIN MOBILE AND OPTUS from year 2001
to 2012. He gained extensive experience in computer hardware and software in
his two previous jobs in Australia. He retired in year 2012 at age 66.
Dedication
This book is dedicated to my daughter Erikka David, to
my fellow UC _BCF alumni, the ultimate success of the E-
Review centre of UC BCF and the success of the UC BCF
CE full membership as per Washington accord.
Inspiration
May this book serves an inspiration for the

undergraduates students of UC –BCF- CE that someday
they may become TOP GUNS, BOARD TOP NOTCHERS,
LEGENDS AND AUTHORS in the UC – BCF CORPS OF CIVIL
ENGINEERS, UNIVERSITY OF CORDILLERAS
EXCERPTS FROM THE SECOND EDETION
The book is primarily intended for the busy field Civil Engineer/Architect who
has no time opening up books, tables or recalling his theory of Reinforced
Concrete never less the book would be a valuable reference for undergraduate
students in Civil Engineering and Architecture whose interest the transition from
classical to digital approach.
Experienced based from my Civil Engineering practice Designing a typical six

storey reinforced concrete structure would normally takes a number of months
using the conventional method but the combinations of all the programs
presented in my book just takes an average of thirty minutes to do the same
job.
EXCERPTS FROM THE FIRST EDETION

Sometimes Civil or particularly Structural Engineers demands that we meet
deadlines from our clients. Without the use of computers team of Engineers
would be needed to do the structural design of buildings. It is the application of
the microcomputer in the fields of Reinforced Concrete Design that I made this
book.
SYSTEMATIC DESIGN OF REINFORCED
CONCRETE STRUCTURES
BY MICRO COMPUTER
By
Bienvenido C. David
B.S.C E. Class 1969 – University Of Cordilleras
P.R.C. NO: 10170
Formerly Construction Engineer (Dam Aspect) Pantabangan Dam, National

Irrigation Administration – 1971 to 1977
Formerly feasibility Study Engineer - Low Cost Housing Development Project
Baguio City, Philippines – 1979 to 1980
Formerly Civil Engineering Practitioner – Baguio City, Philippines 1980 – 1987
Formerly held various positions Work cover Authority of New South Wales,
Australia 1988 – 2000.
Formerly held various positions RSL/SIM PLUS COMMUNICATION COMPANY
Australia 2001 – 2010
Formerly Customer Support Consultant OPTUS COMMUNICATION PTY LTD
Australia 2010 – 2012

PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDETION
The second edition of this book is completely rewritten using the latest
Microsoft office software
So it really looks a technical book. Like the first edition the second edition has
the same objective the application of the micro computer in the fields of
Reinforced Concrete Design. Among the new features of the second edition
includes detail analysis and formula derivations for computer applications. I
have added two classical solutions under chapter eight design of trapezoidal
footing and chapter nine design of cantilever retaining wall to illustrate clearly
in a simple and concise manner how the classical solution is being cast into the
digital solution.
The book consist of 275 pages nine chapters , twenty one computer programs
and two classical solutions.
Chapter one includes three mathematical programs namely the General Cubic
equation (program1), The Newton’s method of approximation (program 2) and
the Simultaneous equations in many unknowns (program no 3). The three
mathematical programs are usually included as a subroutine programs within
the main programs such as program no 16 analysis of columns and
program no 20 design of trapezoidal footing.
As an aid to the practicing Civil Engineer I have included three programs of
structural analysis, program no 4 the three moment equation, program no 5 the
slope deflection and program no 6 the moment distribution method. In program
no 4 and program no 5 the applied mathematical program no 3 is included as a
sub routine program within the main program indicating the importance of
chapter 1
Chapter three is a summary treatment of Reinforced concrete theory and design
useful as a refresher course for practicing Civil Engineers and Architects.
Chapter 4 is all about design of beams and consist program no 7 Design of

Single Reinforced Concrete Beam, program no 8 design of Double Reinforced
Concrete Beam and program no 9 Design of Reinforced Concrete Tee Beam.
Chapter 5 treats one way slab design and two way slab design and under this
chapter program no 10 One Way Slab Design and program no 11 Two Way Slab
Design.
Chapter 6 covers design of web reinforcements using the more accurate AC.I.
code program no 12 design of diagonal tension, deflections of beams and slabs
program no 13 and program no 14 bending of steel reinforcements and
inflection points. In program no 12 and program no 13 the mathematical
program no 3 Newton’s method of approximation is included as a sub – routine
program within the main program.
Chapter 7 covers design of Reinforced Concrete column and made up of two

programs namely program no 15 design of column at balance load and program
no 16 analysis of column in two modes of failure. In program no 16 the applied
mathematical program no 1 is included as a subroutine program within the
main program to solve the depth of stress rectangular block a clearly indicates
the importance of chapter 1
Chapter 8 is all about footings and consists of Square footing program no 17,
Rectangular footing program no 18 and Combined footing program no 19 and
program no 20 trapezoidal footing. I have included under program no 20 a
classical solution (analytical method) to illustrate clearly in a simple and concise
manner how the classical solution is cast into the digital solution.
Chapter 9 Covers Cantilever retaining wall design program no 21. I have
included as well a classical solution which precedes the computer solution.
The programs are based entirely on the Ultimate Strength Theory (USD) except
program no 13 Deflection which is WSD FORMAT (Serviceability theory).
Each program has its own program record showing program description,
drawing and other information to enable the users to understand what the
computer do.
With the emergence of many software languages such as Fortran, Sol, Sql, Pl1,
Pl2 and Turbo Basic. I finally decided to use Advance Basica for Basica is simple,
easy to learn it’s adaptability to a wide variety of programmable calculators
available on the market.
Although the program steps appear simple it is assumed that the reader have a
basic knowledge of computer programming.
The book is primarily intended for the busy field Civil Engineer/Architect who
has no time opening up books, tables or recalling his theory of Reinforced
Concrete never less the book would be a valuable reference for undergraduate
students in Civil Engineering and Architecture whose interest the transition
from classical to digital approach.
Experienced based from my Civil Engineering practice Designing a typical six

storey reinforced concrete structure would normally takes a number of months
using the conventional method but the combinations of all the programs
presented in my book just takes an average of thirty minutes to do the same
job.
The support of my three brothers was a vital factor in the completion of this
book to Engineer Carlos David , a Mechanical Engineer for his financial backing
owing my first generation computer, to Engineer Caesar David, Electrical
Engineer for teaching me the fundamentals of computer programming and to
Engineer Danilo David, Electronic Engineer basic computer programming and
computer housekeeping.
My close associations with competent Engineers & architects during my practice

was exciting and gratifying their valuable suggestions and critical comments
have been greatly acknowledged.
but most of all I am indebted to my UC BCF mentors during my five years as a

student particularly Engineer Avelino Cruz my instructor in Theory of Structures,
Engineer Daniel Cervantes my instructor in Timber Design, Steel Design and
Concrete Design, Engineer Conrado Foronda my instructor in Foundation Of
Structures and Engineer Cecilio Tuanquin my instructor in Graphics 111. The
knowledge I gained from their expertise prompted me to write this book.
The extensive computer experienced I gained from my two previous

employments first Work Cover Authority of New South Wales for 12 years and
second RSL/SIM-PLUS/VIRGIN MOBILE/OPTUS TELECOMMUNICATION
companies in Australia for 12 years was instrumental in rewriting the copy of
my original book.
Finally I want to thank my daughter Erikka David, a graduating Medical

Science/Electrical Engineering student of the university of Sydney for her time
and effort checking the output of my computer programs.
The beautiful clients I met during my Civil Engineering practice in my hometown

Baguio City makes the writing of the original edition of my book a favorable past
time.
This book is dedicated to my daughter Erikka David, to my fellow UC _BCF

alumni, the ultimate success of the E-Review centre of UC BCF and the success
of the UC BCF CE full membership as per Washington accord.
May this book serves an inspiration for the undergraduates students of UC –

BCF- CE that someday they may become TOP GUNS, BOARD TOP NOTCHERS,
LEGENDS AND AUTHORS in the UC – BCF CORPS OF CIVIL ENGINEERS,
UNIVERSITY OF CORDILLERAS.
Bienvenido C. David – January 15, 2015 - Sydney -Australia

PREFACE TO THE ORIGINAL
TYPEWRITTEN EDETION
Three or four years ago I was designing structural
members of various parts of a building , thru
experienced the time involved by using a calculator or
slide rule was to prohibitive that it took me several days
or weeks to design a three or four story reinforced
concrete building.
Sometimes Civil or particularly Structural Engineers

demands that we meet deadlines to submit a structural
plan of the proposed building and to accomplish the
time schedule team of Engineers would be needed to do
the manual calculations.
With the advent of microcomputers, programmable

calculators and mainframe computers there is a change in the technique of structural
computations which maybe called revolutionary and the term is usually referred as
systematized computations.
It is due to these revolutionary changes that this manual was developed. Systematic design of
concrete structure is different from the classical method of approach encountered in different
textbooks in Reinforced Concrete Design. Here the microcomputer plays a major role , no
longer had the Structural Engineer spent his time cracking down his slide rule or calculator,
opening up books and tables but by inserting the correct module desired data can be obtained
in seconds with accuracy far greater than manual calculations.
The arrangement sof the programs follows closely the basic steps in a complete story. It is
applicable to three and four story structure and other type of reinforced concrete members
faced by Civil Engineers from day to day. The design programs is entirely based using the 1977
and 1983 A.C.I. code with the Ultimate Strength Design Theory as the alternative procedure
used.. The program was written in plain basic language and is applicable to a wide variety of
programmable calculators , microcomputers and with some peripherals may be attached to a
main frame computer system.
Each program record has its own drawing and program description to enable the user
understands the program steps involved. Some of the constants appearing were derived by the
author for computer use . Formula derivations are beyond the scope this book . However the
reader is referred to any textbooks in Reinforced Concrete Design for reference..
The manual consists of the following programs. Computer program no 1 and 2 pertains to one
way and two way slab design. Programs no 3,4 and 5 deals with compression beams,
continuous beams, and tee beam. program no 6 deals with columns with bending moment and
axial load combinations followed by program no 7,8, and 9,10 deals with square footing
,trapezoidal footing, combined footing and rectangular footing.. program no 11 is a cantilever
retaining wall design followed by program no 12 design of dia gonal tension followed by
program no 13 calculation of deflection. I have developed two mathematical programs for
design applications namely the General cubic equation program and the Newton’s method of
Approximation for finding roots of equations. These two programs are usually included as sub
routines with in the main program.
I have not included matrix method of structural analysis because I am convinced that there are
many excellent textbooks devoted to this subject. Although it appears quite simple the reader
must have a basic knowledge of computer programming , principle of reinforced concrete
design and a micro computer for practice.
I would like to acknowledge the following textbooks for reference Design of Reinforced
Concrete Structures By George Winter and Nilson, The Theory and practice of Reinforced
Concrete by Clarence W Dunham, Concrete Fundamentals by Phil Moss Ferguson, Foundation
Analysis and Design by Joseph Bowles and Reinforced Concrete Design by William Todd.
I would like to thanks my brother Caesar David, a fifth year electrical engineering graduating
student of Saint Louis University for checking much of the program steps involved and also for
Engineer Carlos David, a mechanical Engineer form lending his personal programmable
calculator.
I hope that by reading this manual the reader is encouraged to continue his studies in this
direction.
Bienvenido C. David
August 30, 1984 Trancoville, Baguio City, Philippines

v
APPLIED MATHEMATICS APPLICATION TO

CONCRETE DESIGN
INTRODUCTION Page 1
THE GENERAL CUBIC EQUATION INTRODUCTION
AND EXAMPLES Page 2 – 3
PROGRAM RECORD Page 4 - 7
NEWTON’S METHOD OF APPROXIMATION
INTRODUCTION, ANALYSIS AND EXAMPLES Page 8 - 9
PROGRAM RECORD PAGE 10 – 13
SIMULTANEOUS EQUATIONS IN MANY UNKNOWNS
INTRODUCTION, ANALYSIS AND EXAMPLES PAGE 11 – 17

vi
STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS
INTRODUCTION PAGE 24
THE THREE MOMENT EQUATION INTRODUCTION PAGE 25 – 26
THE SLOPE DEFLECTION METHOD INTRODUCTION PAGE 40 – 42
THE MOMENT DISTRIBUTION METHOD
INTRODUCTION PAGE 56 – 57
PRORAM RECORD PAGE 58 – 69
MECHANICS AND BEHAVIOUR OF

REINFORCED CONCRETE PAGE70 77
vii
DESIGN OF REINFORCED CONCRETE BEAMS

INTRODUCTION, ANALYSIS AND FORMULA DERIVATIONS FOR
COMPUTER APPLICATIONS Page 78 – 81
SINGLE REINFORCED CONCRETE BEAM

PROGRAM RECORD Page 86 – 91
DOUBLE REINFORCED CONCRETE BEAM

COMPUTER APPLICATIONS page 92 - 95

viii
DESIGN OF TEE BEAM

COMPUTER APPLICATIONS page 102 - 105
DESIGN OF SLABS
INTRODUCTION, ANALYSIS AND FORMULAS Page 115 – 116
ONE WAY SLAB DESIGN

TWO WAY SLAB DESIGN

INTRODUCTION, ANALYSIS AND FORMULAS Page 122 124

ix
WEB REINFORCEMENTS, DEFLECTIONS AND

INFLECTION POINTS
WEB REINFORCEMENTS
DEFLECTIONS
INTRODUCTION, ANALYSIS AND FORMULAS Page 141 - 143
INFLECTION POINTS –Bending of positive and

Negative Reinforcements
INTRODUCTION, ANALYSIS AND FORMULAS Page 152 - 154

x
COLUMNS
Design of Column at Balance Load

Analysis of Column In two Modes of Failure


xi
FOOTINGS
INTRODUCTION Page 188 – 190
Design of Square Footing

INTRODUCTION, ANALYSIS, DESIGN STEPS Page 191 – 193
Rectangular Footing Design

INTRODUCTION, ANALYSIS, DESIGN STEPS Page 200 - 201
Combined Footing
INTRODUCTION, ANALYSIS, DESIGN STEPS Page 208 - 209
Design of Trapezoidal Footing

INTRODUCTION, ANALYSIS AND FORMULA DERIVATION FOR
COMPUTER APPLICATION Page 217 – 219
CLASSICAL SOLUTION (ANALYTICAL METHOD) Page 220 – 227
DESIGN STEPS FOR COMPUTER APPLICATIONS Page 228 - 229

xii
DESIGN OF RETAINING WALLS

INTRODUCTION Page 240 – 241
CANTILEVER RETAINING WALL DESIGN

INTRODUCTION, ANALYSIS AND FORMULA DERIVATION
FOR COMPUTER APPLICATION Page 242 – 249
CLASICAL SOLUTION (ANALYTICAL METHOD) Page 249 – 257

xiii
Page1
APPLIED MATHEMATICS
In this chapter, the three applied mathematics is discussed and explain well.
Included in this chapter are the general cubic equation, the Newton’s method of
approximation and the solution of linear equations in many unknowns. A
general program for each applied mathematics is formulated. In the general
cubic equation program three roots are evaluated and the real positive root is
the only one selected by the computer for design application. In the Newton’s
method of approximation, two general programs were formulated. A program
incorporating 15 trial cycles and the general cycle program. In the simultaneous
equations of many unknowns, a direct computer solution and the general
formulation of struct - math solver three is presented. In the formulation of
struct math solver three, a knowledge of invertion matrix is a pre requisites to
understand the program derivation.
Page2
2
APPLICATION TO CONCRETE DESIGN

INTRODUCTION
The general cubic equation is used to solve roots of a third degree equation. It was first
published in 1545 by H. Cardan in his famous traits called Ars Magna. The clue to this method is
supposed to have been discovered independent by Tartaglia and an earlier writer perhaps
Scipione Del Fierro, all mathematicians just mentioned were Italians.
In the generalized form X3 + BX2 + CX + D = 0 the following solutions apply when B, C & D are
any complex numbers. In the above equation we substitute X = Y – b/3 and we obtained
Y3 + py + q = 0 equation 3 where p = c – b2/3 and q = d – bc/3 + 2b3/27 in

equation 3 we put
y=z- then z3 – p3/27z3 + q = 0 or z6 + qz3 – p3/27 = 0 we note that the above

equation is in quadratic form in z3 then by the quadratic formula we get z3 = -q/2
+ R and z3 = -q/2 – R where R = p3/27 + q2/4 here R maybe an imaginary
number, in such a case, R is understood to represent any one of the two square
root of R.
General cubic equation appears in finding the point of zero shear using the
accurate A.C.I. code, in column design case three for solving the depth of stress
rectangular block, in trapezoidal footing for finding the point of inflection
(bending of bars) and in locating point of maximum deflection of beams and end
moments in continuous beams.
The following equations are examples how the general cubic equation program
is included as a subprogram in the main program.
3
Example 1
Y = .5X3 – 20.652 -150X + 273.43 = 0 Solve for X. This equation is a part of deflect
program solving mathematically we get X = 12.5 by computer it takes just 10
seconds to solve the roots.
Example 2
Consider the equation M = 1.322a3 – 10.577a2 + 162.889 – 2588 = 0 solving for a

= 11.73 by computer this takes around 4 seconds to solve the positive root a. This
is actually a sub program of column design code name anal col.
Example 3
Consider the equation M = -17.9366X3 + 618.5X2 – 3067(X – 0.23) = 0 Solving for

X X is equals to 2.828. This is actually a sub program for TRAP FOOT design of
trapezoidal footing. The value of X here is the point of inflection. Points by which
bars are bent for positive and negative bending. By these examples we note that
the general cubic equation is essential or necessary for design, hence the general
cubic equation program is included as a sub – routine program if their need arise.
*** For further reference see any textbook on algebra.

4
Programmer/Designer/ Structural Engineer : Bienvenido C. David Date: Jan

19, 1970 PRC NO: 10170
DESCRIPTION: Application of STRUCT MATH/Solver 1 to Concrete Design
SUBJECT: Reinforced Concrete Design (USD ALTERNATIVE 1983 ACI

Code)
TITLE: General Cubic Equation program CODE NAME: STRUCT
MATH/Solver 1
MACHINE LANGUAGE : T.I. BASIC COMPUTER: T.I. 99/4A Texas
Instruments Program steps: 33
LIBRARY MODULE; Floppy Disk PROGRAM NAME: Cubic PTR NO:
3046165 at Bagiuo City 01/09/1982
The general cubic equation has the form X3 + BX2 + CX + D = 0 We

let P = C – B2/3
Let Q = D - + 2B3/27 Let R = P3/27 + Q2/4 X1 = Z1 – P/3Z1 – B/3
then
X2 = Z2 – P/3Z2 – B/3 X3 = Z3 – P/3Z3 Z3 = - Q/2 + R1/2 Here Z1, Z2 &
Z3 are roots of cubic equation.*** Note for a more elaborate
discussion of the general cubic equation see reference textbook
REFERENCE TEXTBOOK: College Algebra by William CHAPTER 16 pages 254 – 257
Hart
PROGRAM DISCLAIMER: Any use of the programs to solve problems other than those
displayed is the role responsibility of the user as to whether the output is correct or correctly
interpreted.
5
My first generation home computer
STRUCT MATH/SOLVER 1 Is a computer program that solves the roots of the general cubic
equation. It solves three roots Z1, Z2 AND Z3. This program is written in Advance Basic
language. Struct math solver 1 is included as a sub – program in the shear and diagonal
program to find the root of the cubic equation in the design and analysis of rectangular
column and to find the point of inflection in the bending of steel bars. The program is written
in Advance Basic and can be feed to a wide variety of programmable calculators and micro
computers.
BASIC COMPUTER SYMBOLS
+ ADDITION ^ RAISED TO THE POWER
- SUBTRACTION SQR SQUARE ROOT OF THE NUMBER
MULTIPLICATION * GOTO = JUMP LINE NUMBER
\ DIVISION GO SUB = GO SUB ROUTINE

A.B.S ABSOLUTE VALUE SGN = SIGNUM NOTATION
If true branch out
Branch out IF THEN ELSE STATEMENT

Main program
If false
6
COMPUTER INSTRUCTION CODE
5) Call clear
10) “This is general cubic equation solving roots of a cubic equation”
15) Print “Format is A1X3 + B1X2 + C1X + D = 0
20) REM given coefficients of cubic equations and constant C as input

statements we solve three roots of cubic equations
30) INPUT “A1, B1, C1, D1”:A1, B1, C1, D1
35) B =B1/A1 -8
40) C= C1/A1 123.214
45) D = D1/A1 -1957.64
50) P = C – b^2/3 101.8767
55) Q = D – B*C/3 + 2*B^3/27 1666.9795
60) R = P^3/27 + Q^2/4 733.8627
70) IF R<0 THEN 150
80) Z = -Q/2 + R^.5
90) IF Z<0 THEN 120
100) ZA = Z^.33333
110) GOTO 230
120) ZB = ABS (Z) ^.3333
130) ZA = -ZB
140) GOTO 230

7
150) O = ATN (ABS(R) ^.5/ (-Q/2))/3
160) PI = 2.094395102
170) ZC = ((-Q/20^2 –R) ^.5
180) ZA = (ZC) ^.33333 11.91143
190) IF (-Q/2)>0 THEN 220
200) ZA = -ZA
210) XA = COS (O + 2*PI) *(ZA – P/ (3*ZA)) – B/3)
220) X = COS (O+2*PI)*(ZA – P/ (3*ZA)) – B/3
230) XB = COS (O)*(ZA – P)/(3*ZA)) – B/3 11.7274
240) PRINT “First root XA =”; XA
250) PRINT “Second root X=”; X
260) PRINT ‘Third root XB=”; XB
270) PRINT” Programmed by Bienvenido C. David a Civil Structural Engineer on

Jan 25, 1983 at Baguio City”
280) END
8
Of Approximation
APPLICATION TO Concrete Design
INTRODUCTION
Although the General Cubic Equation can be used for solving the roots of a third degree
equation. In actual case especially design application we are only interested in the real positive
integer root. The Newton method of approximation is sometimes preferable to the General
Cubic equation in relation to concrete design application. The program is usually included as a
sub -routine program in the main program. In the succeeding programs, we see how this
applied mathematical program is included in the main program.
In college algebra the solution of the general polynomial equation in the form
AXn-1 + BXn-1 + CX + D or the general form AXn + BXn-1 + CXn-2 + D = 0 where N is a

positive integer. Either we solved the roots by synthetic division, the general cubic, and the
quartic or assuming a value of X then substituting this value in the said function, such a case
solving the roots would be tedious, time consuming especially when the exponent of X is in the
order greater than two or three. We now introduce a new method known as “The Newton’s
Method of Approximation”. This method is to find to any desired degree the root of an
equation which can’t be solved by elementary methods. To derive the method, let us consider
n n-1
the figure below. Let Yn = F(X) as a function of X = AX + BX + CXn-2 + XDn-3
Y axis
Y = f(X)
O X2 X1 X axis
9
From the figure the root of the equation X coordinate of a point at which the curve crosses the
X axis. Let the first approximation to the root be X = X1 as shown. The point B where the
ordinate AB intersects the curve has the ordinates X =X1 Y = Y1 == F(X1). The tangent at line B
will intersect the X axis at C, whose coordinate X2 maybe a better approximation to the desired
root that is X1. To find X2 knowing X1, note that BA = f(X1), CA = X1 – X2
and = f’(X1) thus f(X1)/X1 – X2 = f’(X1) which yields X2 = X – f(X1)/f’(X1) if we have one
approximation X1 to a root of f(X) = 0, equation 3 gives us another approximation, X2 to that
root... From X2 another approximation X3 is obtained in the same way buy using X3, is
obtained X3 = X2 – f(X2)/f’(X2) and the process can be repeated as many times we wish.
For design application, we shall consider a value of n-3 substituting this value in the general
polynomial equation we have the general cubic equation : Yn = AX3 + BX2 + CX + D to solve the
three roots we put Yn = 0 differentiating Yn we have f’y = 3AX2 + 2BX2 + CX + D thus if X1 is the
or X1 = (AX3) + BX2 + CX + D)/(3AX2 + 2BX +
first root then X2 = X1 –f(y)/f’(y)
C). This process can be continued until the desired root is obtained.
From the previous discussion, the process of obtaining the roots is
simply a cyclic process which can be easily access to basic
programming. We simply treat the following mathematical expression a
subroutines.
1) Y(X) = AX3 + BX2 + CX + D 2) Y’ = 3AX2 + 2BX + C
3) X2 = X1 – F(Y)/F’(Y) in using the input data direct from the

keyboard we simply put coefficients of X3, X2, X and constant D as
numerical datas using the read and data statement. The known
coefficients A, B, C & D must be arranged in their sequential order.
Newton’s method of approximation is used as a sub –routine program

in retaining wall design, dia shear program and case three of column
design. This example is a part of design program.
0.0563556X3 + -0.069626x2 + .2639169x – 162.98 = 0 this value of X is a

point by which minimum steel reinforcement ratio from code
governs.
10

19, 1970 PRC NO: 10170
DESCRIPTION: Application of STRUCT MATH/Solver 2 to Concrete Design

Code)
TITLE: Newton’s Method Of Approximation CODE NAME: STRUCT
MATH/Solver 2
LIBRARY MODULE; Floppy Disk PROGRAM NAME: Newton PTR
NO: 3046165 at Bagiuo City 01/09/1982
The Newton’s Method Of Approximation has the form of

X2 = X1 –F(X1)/F’(X1) here X1 is the first trial root and X2 is the second
trial root. For the General Cubic Equation: AX3 BX2 + CX + D = 0
F’ = 3AX2 + 2BX + C here F = AX3 BX2 + CX + D here A, B, C & D are
known. For a more elaborate explanation of the Newton’s Method Of
Approximation. Ps refer to reference textbook as noted.
REFERENCE TEXTBOOK: Differential & Integral Calculus CHAPTER 17 pages 226 – 230
By Clyde e Love & Earl D.
Rainville
interpreted.
11
STRUCT MATH/SOLVER 2 Is a computer program that determines the real positive root of the
general cubic equation computers. Upon input of the first trial computer solves second trial
root the process continues until the desired root is obtained. We can have many input cycles
T. This program is usually included as a sub routine program in the determination of point of
zero shear using the more accurate A.C.I. code and the inflection points of bars trapezoidal
footing and the analysis of column case three of column design. The program is written in
Basic Language and applicable to a wide variety of programmable calculators and computers.

If true branch out

Main program
If false
12

10) CALL CLEAR
20) PRNT “This is Newton’s Method of Approximation” a program finding the real root
(positive root of a cubic equation)”
25) PRINT “This program was developed by Bienvenido C. David on January 1981”
30) PRINT “ Try a value of X as first trial see if value of trial root is not changing then trial root
approaches real root so that function Y approaches 0”
35) PRINT”Format is AX3 + BX2 + CX + D = 0
40) PRINT “ Input Coefficients of A, B, C, D program line no. 60 as input data’s if ready then
run line no 60”
50 PRINT “Put value of T as no. of trials input statement line no. 70”
55 STOP
60 INPUT” Coefficients of “A, B, C, D”: A, B, C, D
70 INPUT” How many trials T”: T
80 INPUT “Value of X as first trial “: X
90 P = 1
100 Print “I am now performing trial no =”; P
110 PRINT “Assume trial root is =”; X
120 REM Format is Y = AX3 + BX2 + CX + D
130 Y = A*X^3 + B*X^2 + C*X + D
140 IF Y = 0 THEN 150 ELSE 170
150 PRINT “Real root is =; X
160 STOP
13
170 T = T-1
180 IF T=0 THEN 190 ELSE 200
190 STOP
200 R = X
210 GOSUB 280
220 X = S
230 P = P + 1
240 PRINT “I am now performing trial no=”; P
250 PRINT”Trial root is =’; X
260 GOTO 130
270 STOP
280 REM This is a sub routine
290 M = A*R^3 + B*R^2 + C*R + D
300 N =3*A*R^2 + 2*B*R + C
310 S = R – (M/N)
320 RETURN
330 END
14
EQUATIONS IN MANY UNKNOWNS

APPLICATION Structural Analysis 1, & 2 Reinforced concrete beams & frames
INTRODUCTION
In elementary algebra, we met how to solve systems of Linear simultaneous

equations in many unknowns. We either solve these by elimination of addition
and subtraction or by determinants.
Let us consider the following equations.
A1Ma + B1Mb = C1 (1) A2Ma + B2Mb = C2 (2) HERE A1, A2, B1, B2, C1 & C2
are coefficients of unknowns Ma & Mb and C1 & C2 are constants solving Ma in

terms of Mb in (1) we have Ma = (C1 – B1MB)/A1. Substituting the value of Ma in
equation (2) a linear equation in Mb results which can be easily solved.
Substituting the numerical value of Mb in (3) yields the value of Ma. We call this
method solving by substitution. In (2) Multiplying both sides by A1/A2 we get
B2(A1/A2 (Mb) = A1/A2 (C2) Equation 4 subtracting equation (1) and (4) we have
Mb (B1 – B2A1 /A2) = C1 - A1/A2 (C2) (5) By inspection Mb can be solved and
substituting in equation (3) the value of Ma can be evaluated.. The second method
the determinant method, to understand this procedure considers these two
simultaneous equations.
a1x + b1y = k1 (1) a2x + b2y = k2 (2) solving the generalized

equations multiplying equation (1) by b2 gives a1b2x + b1b2y = k1b2 multipling
equation (2) by b1 gives A2b1x + b1b2y = k2b1 subtracting we get
x(a1b2 – a2b1) = k1b2 - k2b1 from which

15
(3) (4)
k1b2 - k2b1 X a1k2 – a2k1 Y
a1b2 – a2b1 a1b2 – a2b1
we can therefore solve any simultaneous equations by memorizing (3) and (4)
The numerators and denominators of these generalized equations are called

determinants . Note that the same determinants appears in the denominators of
both equations (3) and (4), hence we can rewrite equation (3) and (4) as x =
And y = we now need a simple way of memorizing the formula D, Dx and Dy
We can achieve this by writing the numerical coefficients which makes up the
determinants in matrix form. We first write the simultaneous equations in the
systematic form of equation (1) & (2) directly. Below we write the matrices for the
determinants each determinant matrix contains as many vertical columns and
horizontal rows as there are unknowns. The denominator matrix D simply
reproduces the numerical coefficients of the unknowns in the same matrix
position as in the original equation.
Column 1 column 2 Substitution column
a1x + b1y = k1 (1)
a2x + b2y = k2 (2)
k1 b1 a1 k1
k2 b2 x a2 k2 Y
a1 b1 a1 b1 (6)
a2 b2 (5) a2 b2
16
The numerator matrix for the determinant Dx replaces the coefficients of X(a1 and
a2) with the numerical constants k1 & k2 .
To evaluate the three determinants so as to arrive at the same results as eq(3)

and (4) we use the following procedure. Using the denominator determinant D as
an example we require the product a1b1 minus the product a2b1. This can be
accomplished in the D matrix by multiplying coefficients along the diagonals,
always moving diagonally to the right. To obtained the required solution
(a1b2 - a2b1) we always subtract the upward diagonal from the downward
diagonal.
a1 b1 Second operation – Subtract diagonal reverse sign of the
= a1b2 – a2b1
a2 b2 First operation additive diagonal . Checking against the

numerator determinants in eq (3) and (4), we find the same rule applies to the
evaluation of the matrices for Dx & Dy.
For structures consisting of simple spans and two to three storeys heights,
applying the slope deflection method would yield an average of 4 or 5
simultaneous equations. Applying the procedure previously discussed poses no
problem, we either solved the unknown by slide rule or scientific calculator.
However in actual design practice (as usually in the case for high rise buildings)
applying the slope deflection method would yield as many as 100 simultaneous
equations or more. Using the standard procedure would be tedious, laborious and
the time involve would be prohibitive, transforming this to computer language
would require a very large amount of memory (RAM) and typing the programs
would be difficult hence for practical purposes not feasible for computer
application . We therefore keep this method for some time and introduced a new
17
method not encountered in elementary mathematics we call this the matrix

reduction method for solving simultaneous equations in many unknowns. ****
Detailed discussion of this method is not discussed here. The reader is referred to
“Elementary Structural Analysis by Noris & Wilbur” 4rth edition or William H Tall
analysis of structures a computer approach.
The advantage of this method , it can be access in BASIC language and second the
method permits the solutions of many simultaneous equations in many
unknowns.
For our computer input we simply arrange the coefficients of the unknowns in
their sequential order from left to right beginning equation 1 as data statement
and put this numerical values program line no 360.
Arrange constants from top to bottom beginning equation one put numerical
values program line no 230
Put no of equations INPUT statement program line no 150
COMPUTER OUTPUT
Upon input of numerical datas into keyboard, computer prints on the screen
both the arrays and numerical values of unknowns in their sequential order. An
average microcomputer can solve 20 unknowns in just 1 minute.
To show you an example Consider the equations
1) 12.8 Mb + 2.4Mc = -1555.2 in this example data 360 would be 12.8, 2.4,
2) 2.4 Mb + 16.8 Mc = -1495.2 16.8
Here data 230 would be -1555.2, -1495.2
Input no of equations = 2 program line no 150
type run program line no 140 Answers Mb = -107.7 Kip foot
Mc = -73.62
18

19, 1970 PRC NO: 10170
DESCRIPTION: STRUCT MATH/Solver 3 Application to Concrete Design

Code)
TITLE: Simultaneous Equations CODE NAME: STRUCT MATH/Solver 3
LIBRARY MODULE; Floppy Disk PROGRAM NAME: Simul Bas PTR
NO: 3046165 at Bagiuo City 01/09/1982
Struct math has the generalized form of

AX + BX + CZ = C Equation1 In the above equations we put constants as
A1X + B1Y + C1Z = C1 Equation 2 numerical data statements and coefficients of X,Y,Z
A2X + B2Y + C2Y = C2 Equation 3 & Q in their respective orders from left to right.
A3X + B3Y + C3Z = C3 Equation 4 Put no of equations N & press enter.
REFERENCE TEXTBOOK: Analysis of Structures by
William H Tall a computer
approach
interpreted.
19
STRUCT MATH/SOLVER 3 is a computer program that solves the unknowns in the said
equations. Any no. of equations can be solved. Upon input of numerical datas, computer
solves the unknowns in sequence printing on the screen numerical values of the unknowns.
This program is actually incorporated as a sub program in the slope deflection method for
solving joint rotations and translations. The program is written in Basic Language and
applicable to a wide variety of programmable calculators and computers.

If true branch out

Main program
If false
20
5 CALL CLEAR
10 PRINT “This is a computer program for solving simultaneous equations linear

algebraic equations in many unknowns”
15 PRINT” Be sure you know matrix method of structural analysis otherwise I

can’t solve the unknowns”
17 PRINT” Transform slope equations into array form and by matrix algebra for
computer use”
18 PRINT” If ready then run line no 110”
20 STOP
110 CALL CLEAR
120 PRINT” Put coefficients in data order starting on line 460. Coefficients must
be arrange from their sequential order left to right”
125) PRINT “List value of constants starting from top to bottom as data
statement program line no 230, put no of equations input statement line no 50
then run line 140”
130 STOP
140 CALL CLEAR
150 INPUT “No of equations”: N
160 OPTION BASE 1
170 DIM X (20, 20)

21
180 DIM Y (20)
190 DIM X (20)
200 FOR E = 1 TO N
210 READ Z9E)
220 NEXT E
230 DATA Values of constants
240 GOSUB 400
250 GOSUB 600
260 MAT = DELTA
270 FOR E = 1 TO N
280 GOSUB 400
290 FOR AB = 1 TO N
300 X (AB, E) =Z (AB)
310 NEXT AB
320 GOSUB 600
330 F = DELTA/MAT
340 PRINT” CHR$(64 + E);”=”; F
350 NEXT E
360 END
400 RESTORE 460
410 FOR Q =1 TO N
420 FOR P=1 TO N

22
430 READ X (Q, P)
440 NEXT P
450 NEXT Q
460 DATA Note value of Coefficients
470 RETURN
480 STOP
590 REM A SUB ROUTINE
600 A = 1
610 FOR P = 0 TO N-3
620 for s = 1 N – P
630 IFX (1, 1) = 0 THEN 780
640 Y(S) = X(S, 1)
650 NEXT S
660 A = Y (1)*A
670 FOR R =1 TO N-P-1
680 FOR Q = 1 TO N-P-1
690 X (Q, R) = X (Q+1, R+1)-X (1, R+1)*Y (Q+1)/Y (1)
700 NEXT Q
710 NEXT R
720 NEXT P
730 DELTA = A*(X (1, 1)*X (2, 2)-X (2, 1)*X (1, 2))
*** Note for array type program line no: 740 to 760
23
740 PRINT”X (1, 1); X (1, 2)
750 PRINT X (2, 1); X (2, 2)
760 PRINT” TAB 95);”DELTA=”DELTA
770 RETURN
780 FOR D =1 TO N-P
790 IF X (D, 1) <>0 THEN 810
800 NEXT D
810 FOR B=1 TO N-P
820 W = X (1, B)
830 X (1, B) = X (D, B)
840 X (D, B) = W
850 NEXT B
860 IF INT (D/2)><D/2 THEN 880
880 GOTO 620
890 END
900 PRINT” This program was developed by Bienvenido C. David on March

1982”
24
In this chapter three programs of “STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS” are presented, the

three moment equation, the slope deflection and the moment distribution
method. In the moment distribution method two methods were employed, the
seven cycle distribution and the general moment distribution program. The use
of “Struct – math solver three is used as a sub – routine program in slope
deflection and three moment equation respectively. Any of the three programs
presented can be used to analyze a continuous reinforced beams and frames. If
précised moments are desired, the three moment equation will be use full. If
joint rotations and translation is of prime importance, the slope deflection
program will provide accurate numerical results. If modified stiffness is used the
moment distribution method alternative three will be use full. In any case, the
“General moment distribution program” is use full to any desired degree of
accuracy. Employing one method, the other two will be a cross checked.
25
INTRODUCTION
The three moment equation can be used to analyze statically indeterminate
beams. The three moment equation has the generalized form of
M1L1 + 2M2 (L1 + L2) + M3L2 + 6A1 1/L1 + 6A2 2 /L2 = 6EI (h1/L1 + h3/L2)
Where the points are on the same level in the deflection beam, the height h1 and
h3 becomes zero and so thus the right hand term of the above equation.
Below are the following legends used

M1 = Moment at support 1 Span one M2 = Moment at support 2 Span two
M3 = Moment at support 3 Span three L1 = length of Span one in feet
L2 = Length of Span two in feet h1 = Deflection in inches if support yields
h3 =Deflection in inches if support yields at support three.
I = Moment of inertia of beams.
E = Young’s modulus of elasticity
For type of loadings on span table 8 – 1 page 276 of “Strength of Materials by

Ferdinand Singer” list values of 6A /L and 6A /L
In our case we shall deal with a concentrated load and uniform loads see attached
figure as shown in the “PROGRAM RECORD”.
A) For concentrated load: 6A /L = Pa/L(L2 – a2)

B) 6A /L = Pb/L (L2 – b2)
C) For uniform loads = 6A /L = wl3 /4 and 6A /L = wl3/4
D) here a is the distance of P from R1 and b is the distance of P from R2 where
26
E) R1 and R2 are reactions of simply supported span.
P = Concentrated load in pounds or in kips.
L = Span length in feet
w = Uniform loads in pounds or in Kips per foot.
*** Note For a more detail discussion of this subject refers to Ferdinand Singer
pages 270 – 277 “Strength of Materials 2nd edition.
From the figure and applying the generalized form of the three moment equation
we have
X1(Ma) + 2Y1 (Mb) + Z1 (Mc) = C1 Equation 1
X2(Mb) +2Y2 (Mc) + Z2 (Md) = C2 Equation 2
here X, Y, Z is coefficients of moments where the numbers 1, 2, 3are coefficients

subscripts... Also we note that Ma = 0 and Md = W4 (L4)2 + P4 (Y4)
COMPUTER OUTPUT
Upon input of numerical data’s computer first solved coefficients X, Y, C and

constants C1 and C2. it prints on the screen equation one and two. With values of
coefficients as numerical data’s, it solves the unknowns in the said equations thus
a solutions of simultaneous equations is included as a sub – routine program in
the main program. In the third run with end moments known. Computer solves
shear reactions at support.
27

19, 1970 PRC NO: 10170
DESCRIPTION: ANALYSIS ONE: Application to Concrete Design

Code)
TITLE: Analysis of continues beam by the three moment equation
CODE NAME: ANALYSIS ONE
LIBRARY MODULE: Floppy Disk PROGRAM NAME: Analysis one
PTR NO: 3046165 at Bagiuo City 01/09/1982
Loading Diagram P2 P3 P4
W1/ft W2/FT
L1 L2 L3 L4
Shear Diagram
28
Moment Diagram
REFERENCE TEXTBOOK:
Statically Indeterminate CHAPTER 6 PAGES 121 - 127
Structures By Chu Kia
Wang
interpreted.
ANALYSIS ONE: IS a computer program that analyzes a Statically Indeterminate Beam or

frame by the three moment equation. Three spans with overhang uniform loads and
additional superimposed loads (concentrated loads located at any distance X is included). The
program is written in Basic Language and applicable to a wide variety of programmable
calculators and computers.

If true Branch out IF THEN ELSE STATEMENT
Branch out
Main program IF False
29

10 CALL CLEAR
20 PRINT “This is computer program no. 4 in basic language Analysis of statically

indeterminate beams and frames by the three moment equation.”
40 PRINT” If all data’s are in their consistent units then run line no 60”
50 STOP
60 DATA W1, L1 3, 12
70 DATA W2, L2 2, 24
75 DATA X1, L1 0, 12
80 DATA P1, X1, L1 0, 0, 12
90 DATA W2, L2 2, 24
100 DATA X2, L2 12, 24 for debugging purposes only to check
110 DATA P2, X2, L2 20, 12, 24 Computer output only
120 DATA X3, L3 4, 12
130 DATA W3, L3 0, 12
140 DATA P3, X3, L3 18, 4, 12
150 INPUT “Relative stiffness factors “: K1, K2, K3, K4:K1, K2, K3, K4 3, 10, 2, 0
160 INPUT “Span length in feet L1, L2, L3, L4”:L1, L2, L3, L4 12, 24, 12, 3
170 INPUT” Uniform and concentrated loads W4, P4”: W4, P4 0, 6
180 INPUT” Distance of concentrated loads from support X”: X 3
190 X1 = 2*(L1/K1 + L2/K2)
200 X2 = L2/K2
30
210 RESTORE 60
220 GOSUB 930
230 T1 = T
240 GT =T1/K1
250 RESTORE 70
260 GOSUB 830
270 A1L1 = A
280 RESTORE
290 GOSUB 980
300 Q1 = Q
310 R1 = 6*Q1*A1L1/ (K1*L1)
320 U1 = G1 + R1
340 REM For span two
350 RESTORE 90
360 GOSUB 930
370 T2 = T
380 G2 =T2/K2
390 RESTORE 100
400 GOSUB 880
410 B2L2 = B
420 RESTORE 110
430 GOSUB 980

31
440 Q2 = Q
450 R2 = 6*Q2*B2L2/ (K2*L2)
460 U2 = G2 + R2
470 C1 = - (U1 + U2)
480 PRINT TAB (2); X1;”MB”; TAB (7); X2;”MC”; TAB (15); =”C1
490 REM For second equation span two
500 RESTORE 90
510 GOSUB 930
520 T3 = T
530 G3 = T3/K2
540 REM For concentrated load i.e. centroid
550 RESTORE 100
560 GOSUB 830
570 A2L2 = A
580 RESTORE 110
590 GOSUB 980
600 Q3 = Q
610 R3 = 6*Q3*A2L2/ (K2*L2)
620 U3 = G3 + R3
630 REM For span three uniform load w/Ft
640 RESTORE 130
650 GOSUB 930

32
660 T4 = T
670 G4 = T4/K3
680 REM For concentrated load span three
690 restore 120
700 GOSUB 880
710 B3L3 = B
720 RESTORE 140
730 GOSUB 980
740 Q4 = Q
750 R4 = 6*Q4*B3L3/ (K3*L3)
760 U4 = R4 + G4
770 C = (W4*L4^2/2 + P4*J)*L3/K3
780 C 2 = - (U4 + C +U3)
790 X3 = L2/K2
800 X4 = 2*(L2/K2 + L3/K3)
810 PRINT TAB (2); X3;”MB”; TAB (7); X4;”MC”; TAB (15);”=”; C2
820 STOP
830 REM this is sub routine 1
840 READ X, L
850 A = (X + L)/3
860 RETURN
870 STOP
33
880 REM this is sub routine no 2
890 READ X, L
900 B = -1/3*X + 2/3*L
910 RETURN
920 STOP
940 READ W, L
950 T = 1/4*W*L^3
960 RETURN
970 STOP
990 READ P, X, L
1000 Q = 1/2*(-P*X^2 + P*X*L)
1010 RETURN
1020 STOP
3000 REM With three moment equations known solved the equations. Start at
3010 line number
3010
CALL CLEAR
3020 PRINT” Put coefficients in data order form starting line 3130, then run line
no 3040”
3030 STOP
34
3040 CALL CLEAR
3050 INPUT” No of equations”N: N
3060 OPTION BASE 1
3070 DIM X (20, 20)
3080 DIM Y (20)
3090 DIM Z (20)
3100 for E = 1 TO N
3110 READ Z (E)
3120 NEXT E
3130 DATA * Note put coefficients of Ma, Mb
3140 GOSUB 3300
3150 GOSUB 3500
3160 MAT = DELTA
3170 FOR E = 1 TO N
3180 GOSUB 3300
3190 FOR AB = 1 TO N
3200 X (AB, E) = Z (AB)
3210 NEXT AB
3220 GOSUB 3500
3230 F = DELTA/MAT
3240 PRINT CHRS$(64 + E);”=”; F
3250 NEXT E
35
3260 END
3300 RESTORE 3360
3310 FOR Q = 1 TO N
3320 FOR P = 1 TO N
3330 READ X (Q, P)
3340 NEXT P
3350 NEXT Q
3360 DATA ***Put constants of equation 1 & 2
3380 RETURN
3500 REM this is a sub routine
3505 A = 1
3510 FOR P = 0 TO N – 3
3520 FOR S=1 TO N-P
3530 IX X (1, 1) = 0 THEN 680
3540 Y(S) = X(S, 1)
3550 NEXT S
3560 A = Y (1)*A
3570 FOR R =1 TO N-P-1
3580 FOR Q =1 TO N-P-1
3590 X (Q, R) = X (Q + 1, R + 1) – X (1, R+1)*Y (Q+1)/Y*(1)
3600 NEXT Q
3610 NEXT R
36
3620 NEXT P
3630 DELTA = A*(X (1, 1)*X (2, 2)*X (1, 2))
*** Note for array
3640 PRINT X (1, 1); X (1, 2)
3650 PRINT X (2, 1); X (2, 2)
3660 PRINT TAB (5);”DELTA =”DELTA
3670 RETURN
3680 FOR D = 1 TO N-P
3690 IF X (D, 1)><0 THEN 3710
3700 NEXT D
3710 FOR B = 1 TO N-P
3720 W = X (1, B)
3730 X (1, B) = X (D, B)
3740 X (D, B) = W
3750 NEXT B
3760 IF INT (D/2)><D/2 THEN 3780
3770 A = -1*A
3780 GOTO 3520
3790 STOP
*Note with moments at ends already solved reactions at support
4010 CALL CLEAR

37
4020 PRINT “This is a sub routine program for three moment equation
determination of shear reaction at supports with end moments known”
4025 PRINT ‘Input the following values as data statements in program line no
4030”
4030 DATA MA1, MB1, W1, L1, P1, A1 MA2, MB2, W2, L2, P2, A2, MA3, MB3, W3,
L3, P3, A3
4035 DATA W4, A4, P4
4040 REM this is a one dimension array
4045 REM let us consider three spans
4050 dim ma (3)
4055 DIM MB (3)
4060 DIM W (3)
4070 DIM L (3)
4080 DIM P (3)
4090 DIM A (3)
4100 FOR X =1 TO 3
4110 READ MA(X), MB(X), W(X), L(X),P(X),A(X)
4120 RESTORE 4030
4130 R1(X) = MA(X) + MB(X) +W(X)*L(X) ^2/2 + P(X)*L(X) –A(X))
4140 RA(X) = R1(X)/L(X)
4150 PRINT RA(X)
4160 NEXT X
38
4170 RA1 =RA (1)
4180 RB1 = RA (2)
4190 RC1 = RA (3)
4200 REM For shear reactions at R2
4205 DIM MA1 (3)
4210 DIM MB1 (3)
4220 DIM W1 (3)
4230 DIM PI (3)
4225 DIM L1 (3)
4240 DIM A1 (3)
4250 FOR Y=1 TO 3
4260 READ NA1(Y), MB1(Y), W1(Y), L1(Y), P1(Y), A1(Y)
4280 R2(Y) = MA1(Y) + MB1(Y) + W1(Y)*L1(Y) ^2/2 + P1(Y)*A1(Y)
4290 RB(Y) = R2(Y)/ (L1(Y))
4300 PRINT RB(Y)
4310 NEXT Y
4320 RA2 = R2 (1)
4330 RB2 = R2 (2)
4340 RC2 = R2 (3)
4350 QA = RA1
4360 PRINT TAB (3);”Shear reaction at support=”; QA;”KIPS”

39
4370 PRINT TAB (6);”Shear reaction at support B=”; QB;”Kips”
4365 QB = RA2 + RB1
4390 QC = RB2 + RC1
4400 PRINT TAB (10);”Shear reaction at support C=”; QC;”Kips”
4410 READ W4, A4, P4
4420 DATA *** Note for data put value of w4, A4 & P4
4430 RD1 = W4 + A4 + P4
4435 QD = RD1 + RC2
4440 PRINTTAB (15);”Shear reaction at support D=”; RD;”Kips”
4450 PRINT Programmed by Bienvenido C. David a Civil Engineer on May 5, 1981

at Baguio City”
4460 END
40
.
41
40
INTRODUCTION
In the early’s 1950 two methods in Structural Engineering were developed namely the Matrix method of
“Structural Analysis” and ‘Dynamics of Structures”. The coverage of these new methods is so extensive
that a number of excellent books are devoted to this subject.
Systematic structural analysis, “Finite element method” and matrix method of “Structural Analysis” has
all the same meaning. According to its basic principle, because of a structure instead of being a
continuation of differential elements is idealized as a composition of a number of finite pieces. This idea
enables the step by step building of the force displacement relationship of a structure from those basic
elements of which the structure is composed.
Many complicated problems in various fields are thus solved by this new computational technique
including truss beams, rigid frames, plates and shells, composite structures and pressure vessels and
torsion in members with irregulars section.
During the past decades, the rapid development of computers and the growing demand for better
method of analysis for complex and lightweight structures led to the development of “Matrix method of
Structural Analysis”.
It is true that classical methods of “Structural Analysis” such as the method of consistent deformation,
Slope Deflection method, castigliano’s theorem, which have only limited use in the
Past because of operational difficulties, have now regained their strength because of the
invention of the digital computer. Indeed solving a set of 100 simultaneous equations with a
modern computer would hardly take a minute and the solution of simultaneous equations is
equivalent to inverting a matrix.
The slope deflection method can be used to analyze all types of statically indeterminate beams
or rigid frames. The assumption is that all joints are considered rigid, i.e. the angles between
the members at the joints are considered not to change in value as loads are applied.
41
By derivation the general analysis “Slope Deflection Equation” is
Mab = Mfab + (-2 A - B) Equation 1
Mba = Mfba + (-2 B - A) Equation 2
Here is the relative stiffness ratio and represented by the symbol K , A & B
are end joint rotations in radians at support A, B respectively.
Mfba = Fixed end moments of member BA
Mfab = Fixed end moments of member AB
For uniform loads Mfab = + wl2/12 and equals to - Mfba = - wl2/12
For concentrated loads Mfab = + Pab2/L2 = Mfba – Pba2/L2
Substituting in the value of K =I/L in equation one
We get Mab = Mfab + KAB (-2 A - B) Equation one
Mba = Mfba + Kab (-2 B - A) Equation two
SUGGESTED STEPS
a) Determine the fixed end moments at the end of e ach span using
the formulas mentioned.
b) Express all end moments in terms of the fixed end moments and
the joint rotations by using the slope deflections.
c) Established simultaneous equations with rotations at the supports
as unknowns by applying the conditions that the sum of the end
42
moments acting on the ends of the two members meeting at the

support should be zero.
d) Solve for the rotations at the supports and substitute back into
the “Slope deflection Equations” and comute end moments.
e) Determine all reactions, draw shear and moment diagram and
sketch the curve.
f) Referring from figure in the program record the moment at Joint
A is zero Mab = 0
g) At Joint B Mba + Mbc = 0
h) At joint C Mcb + Mcd + 0
i) At Joint D Mdc = (W4x(L4)2) /2 + P4xy4
COMPUTER OUTPUT
Upon input of numerical data’s computer first solved fixed end

moments. Plot on the screen slope deflection equations, a break
statement is given to enable the user to substitute numerical data’s
into slope deflection equations.
Computer solves joint rotations of end members in succession

substitute back known joint rotations in radians in slope deflection
equations and solves corresponding end moments. With the end
moments as input data it solves required reactions at support A, B,C &
D.
43

19, 1970 PRC NO: 10170
DESCRIPTION: ANALYSIS TWO: Application to Concrete Design

Code)
TITLE: Slope Deflection Method CODE NAME: ANALYSIS TWO
LIBRARY MODULE: Floppy Disk PROGRAM NAME: Analysis Two
W1/ft W2/FT
L1 L2 L3 L4
Shear Diagram
44
Moment Diagram
REFERENCE TEXTBOOK:
Wang
interpreted.
ANALYSIS Two: IS a computer program that solves joint rotations , displacements, end
moments and reactions of three spans with overhang statically indeterminate beams and
frames variable uniform and concentrated loads at any location Y is included (refer to figure
program record 5). The program is written in Basic Language and applicable to a wide variety
of programmable calculators and computers with peripheral attachments can be integrated
to E Review center.

Main program
If False Branch out
45
10 CALL CLEAR
20 REM this is Slope deflection method of determining moment

coefficients of indeterminate beams as analysis of structures
30 PRINT “Be sure you know matrix method of structural analysis or

matrix algebra otherwise I can’t perform the mathematical operation”
40 PRINT “ L1, L2 ,L3, L4 as span length on feet DL1, DL2, DL3, DL4, LL1,
LL2,LL3, LL4 as uniform loads respectively”
50 PRINT “ Y1, Y2, Y2, Y3, Y4 as distance of concentrated load from

support respectively and let I1, I2, I3 & I4 as moment of inertia constant
for uniform cross section”
60 PRINT “PD1, PD2, PD3, & PD4 as concentrated dead load and PL1,
PL2, PL3 and PL4 as concentrated live load in pounds and pounds per
foot”
70 PRINT “If all data’s are in their consistent units then run line no 80”
75 STOP
80 CALL CLEAR
90 REM first determine moment equation in slope deflection form and

put final results into array format
100 INPUT” DL1, DL2, DL3, DL4, LL1, LL2, LL3, LL4”:DL1, DL2, DL3, DL4,
LL1, LL2, LL3, LL4
110 INPUT “PD1, PD2, PD3, PD4, PL1, PL2, PL3, PL4”:PD1, PD2, PD3,
PD4, PL1, PL2, PL3, PL4
46
120 W1 =1.4*DL1 + 1.7*LL1 2299.1
130 W2 = 1.4*DL2 + 1.7*LL2 1999.5
140 W3 = 1.4*DL3 + 1.7*LL3
150 W4 = 1.4*DL4 + 1.7*LL4
160 P1 = 1.4*PD1 + 1.7*PL1
170 P2 = 1.4*PD2 + 1.7*PL2
180 P3 = 1.4*PD3 + 1.7*PL3
190 P4 = 1.4*PD4 + 1.7*PL4
200 REM Let MFAB, MFBA, MFBC, and MFCB & MFDC & MFCD as end
moments respectively
210 INPUT “Span length in feet L1, L2, L3, L4”:L1, L2, L3, L4
220 INPUT “Distance of concentrated loads from end of supports in feet

YI, Y2, Y3, Y4”:Y1, Y2, Y3, Y4
230 MFAB = (W1*L1^2/12 + P1*Y1*(L1-Y1) ^2/L1^2)/1000 36
240 MFBA = - (W1*L1^2/12 + P1*(L1-Y1)*Y1^2/L1^2)/1000 -36
250 MFBC = (W2*L2^2/12 + P2*Y2*(L2-Y2)*Y2^2
260 MFCB = - (W2*L2^2/12 + P2* (L2-Y2)*Y2^2/L2^2)/1000 -156
270 MFCD = (W3*L3^2/12 + P3*Y3*(L3-Y3) ^2/L3^2)/ 1000 32
280 MFDC = - (W3*L3^2/12 + P3*(L3-Y3)*Y3^2/L3^2)/1000 = -16

47
290 PRINT “ Assume dimension of beam constant tru out then let
relative stiffness factors as K1, K2, K3, K4 then type continue to resume
running”
300 BRAK
310 INPUT” Moment of inertia I1, I2, I3, I4”:I1, I2, I3, I4
320 K1 = I1*12/L1
330 K2 =I2*12/L2
340 K3 = I3*12/L3
350 K4 = I4*12/L4
360 X1 =-2*K1
370 X2 =-K1
380 X3 = --K1
390 X4 = -2*(K1 + K2)
400 X5 = -K2
410 X6 =-2*(K2 + K3)
420 X7 = -K2
430 X8 = -K3
440 X9 = -2*K3
450 X10 = -K3
460 C1 = -MFAB
48
470 C2 = - (MFBA + MFBC)
480 C3 = - (MFBC + MFCD)
490 C4 = - (P4*Y4 + W4*L4^2/2) + MFDC
500 REM Establish slope deflection equations
510 PRINT TAB (2);

X1;”A”;TAB(8);X2;”B”;TAB(15);”C”;TAB(22);”D”;TAB(27);”=”;C1
***Note resulting equation is -6A -3B = -36 Equation 1
520) PRINT TAB (2); X3;”A”; TAB98); X4;”B”; TAB (15); X5;”C”; TAB (22)
;”D”; TAB (27);”=”; C2
*** Note resulting equation is -3XA -16B -5C = -120 Equation 2
530 PRINT TAB(8);X7;”B”;TAB(15);X6;”C”;TAB(22);X8;”D”;TAB(27);”=”C3
*** Note resulting equation is -5B -14C -2D = 124 Equation 3
540 PRINT TAB (15); X10;”C”; TAB (22); X9;”D”TAB (27);”=”; C3
*** Note resulting equation is -2C -4D = 2 Equation 4
550 PRINT” Can you solved the above equations or would you like I will
solve it for you if so then run line no. 70”
560 STOP
570 PRINT “This is computer program no 3 solutions of simultaneous

equations in many unknowns a sub program of slope deflection”
580 PRINT” Be sure you know matrix method of structural analysis or

matrix algebra otherwise I can’t solve the above equations”
49
585 PRINT “ Arrange coefficients of unknowns in their sequential order

from left to right as data statement program line no 70”
600 PRINT “Arrange value of constants top to bottom as data

statements program line no 690”
605 PRINT “ Put no of equations program line no 650 as input

statement if all data’s are secured then run line number 640”
620 STOP
640 CALL CLEAR
650 INPUT” NUMBER OF EQUATIONS”: N
660 OPTION BASE 1
670 DIM X (20, 20)
680 DIM Y (20)
690 DIM Z (20)
700 FOR E = 1 TO N
710 READ Z (E)
720 NEXT E
730 DATA C1, C2, C3, C4
740 GOSUB 900
750 GOSUB 1100
760 MAT = DELTA
770 FOR E= 1 TO N
50
780 GOSUB 900
790 FOR AB = 1 TO N
800 X (AB, E) =Z (AB)
810 NEXT AB
820 GOSUB 1100
830 F = DELTA/MAT
840 PRINT CHR$(64 + E);”=; F
850 NEXT E
860 END
900 RESTORE 960
910 FOR Q=1 TO N
920 FOR P=1 TO N
930 READ X (Q, P)
940 NEXT P
950 NEXT Q
960 DATA X1,X2,0,0,X3,X5,0,0,X7,X6,X8,0,0X10,X9 Example only
980 RETURN
990 REM this is a sub routine
1100 A = 1
1010FOR P=0 TO N-3

51
1020 FOR S=1 TO N-P
1030 IF X (1, 1) = 0 THEN 1080
1040 Y(S) = X(S, 1)
1050 NEXT S
1060 A = Y (1)*A
1070 FOR R =1 TO N-P-1
1080 FOR Q =1 TO N-P-1
1090 X (Q, R) = X (Q + 1, R + 1) – X (1, R + 1)*Y (Q + 1)/Y (1)
1100 NEXT Q
1110 NEXT R
11120 NEXT P
1130 DELTA = A*(X (1, 1)*X (2, 2)-X (2, 1)*X (1, 2))
1140 PRINT X (1, 1); X (1, 2)
1150 PRINT X (2, 1); X (2, 2)
1160 PRINT TAB (5);”DELTA=”DELTA
1170 RETURN
1180 FOR D=1 TO N- P
1190 IF X (D, 1) <>0 THEN 1310
1200 W = X (1, B)
1230 X (1, B) = X (D, B)

52
1240 X (D, B) = W
1250 NEXT B
1260 IF INT (D/2) <>D/2 THEN 1280
1270 A = -1*A
1280 GOTO 1120
1290 STOP
1300 REM with known moments and joint rotations solved substitute
Numerical values back slope deflection equations
1310 INPUT” Known joint rotations in radians A, B, C, D”: A, B, C, D
1320 INPUT” Relative stiffness factors K1, K2, K3, and K4”:K1, K2, K3,
and K4
1330 INPUT “Fixed end moments in foot kips”: MFBA
1335 INPUT “Fix end moments

MFAB,MFBA,MFBC,MFCB,MFCD,MFDC,”:MFAB,MFBA,MFBC,MFCD,MF
DC,MFCB
1340 MAB = MFAB +K1*(-2*A-B)
1350 PRINT “Moment at joint A first span MAB =”MAB;”Ft Kips”
1360 MBA = MFBA + K1 (-2*B-A)
1370 PRINT “Moment at joint B first span MBA =”; MBA;”Ft Kips”
1380 MBC = MFBC + K2*(-2*B-C)
1390 PRINT “Moment at joint C=”; MBC;”Ft Kips”

53
1400 MCB = MFCB + K2*(-2*C-B)
1410 PRINT “Moment at joint C second span =”; MCB;”Ft Kips”
1420 MCD = MFCD + K3*(-2*C-D)
1430 PRINT “Moment at joint C third span MCD”=”; MCD;”Ft Kips”
1440 MDC = MFDC + K3*(-2*D-C)
1450 PRINT” Moment at joint D third span MDC” =”; MDC;”Ft kips”
1460 PRINT “Copy end moments then type continue to resume

running”
1470 BREAK
1480 REM Computations of shear reactions at supports
1490 REM Let RA, RB, RC, RD Total vertical shear reactions at support
1500 INPUT “Uniform loads in pounds per Ft W1, W2, W3, W4”:W1,
W2, W3, W4
1510 INPUT” Concentrated loads in pounds

P1,P2,P3,P4”:P1,P2,P3,P4”:P1,P2,P3,P4
1520 INPUT” Span length in feet L1,L2,L3,L4”:L1,L2,L3,L4
1530 INPUT “Distances of concentrated loads from support

Y1,Y2,Y3,Y4”:Y1,Y2,Y3,Y4
1540 RA1 = (W1*L1^2/2 + P1*(L1-Y1) – MBA)/(1000*L1) in kips

54
1550 INPUT “Fixed end moments

MAB,MBA,MBC,MCB,MCD,MDC”MAB,MBA,MBC,MCB,MCD,MDC
1560 RA1 = (W1*L1^2/(2*1000) + P1*(L1-Y1)/1000 – MBA)/L1
1570 RB1 = (MBA + P1*Y1/1000 + W1*L1^2/2000)/L1
1580 RB2 = (MBC – MCB + W2*L2^2/2000 + P2*(L2–Y2)/1000)/L2
1590 RB = RB1 + RB2
1600 PRINT “ Total vertical shear reaction at support A=”;RA1;”Kips”
1610 PRINT “Total vertical shear reaction at support B=”;RB;”Kips”
1620 RC1 = (MCB – MBC + P2*Y2/1000 + W2*L2^2/2000)/L2
1630 RC2 = (MCD – MDC + W3*L3/2000 + P3*(L3-Y3)/1000)/L3
1640 RC = RC1 + RC2
1650 PRINT “Total vertical reaction at support C=”RC;”Kips”
1660 REM Summation of forces vertical equals zero
1670 RD1 = (MDC - MCD + W3*L3^2/2000 + P3*Y3)/1000)/L3
1680 RD2 = P4/1000 + W4*Y4
1690 RD = RD1 + RD2
1700 PRINT “ Total vertical shear reaction at support D=”;RD;”Kips”
1710 PRINT “ Draw shear and moment diagram by hand and determine
point of maximum positive moment”
55
1720 PRINT” programmed by Bienvenido C. David a Civil/Structural

Engineer on December 16, 1982”
1730 END
56
56
INTRODUCTION
In 1932 professor Hardy Cross of University of Illinois developed the method of

“Moment Distribution Method” to solve problems inn beams and frame analysis which
involves many unknowns’ joint displacements and rotations. For the next three decades,
moment distribution provides the standard means in engineering offices for the analysis of
indeterminate frames.
The moment distribution method can be regarded as an iterative solution of the slope
deflection equations starting with fixed end moments for each member; these are modified in a
series of cycles, each converging on the precise final result, to account for translation and
rotations of the joints. The resulting series can be terminated whenever one reaches the degree
of accuracy required.
SUMMARY STEPS
a) Assume that all supports are fixed or locked and compute fixed end moments for each
span considered separate from every other span.
57
b) Unlock each support and distribute the unbalanced moment at each one to each
adjacent span by the equation DF = K/SUM K
c) Here DF is the distribution factor K is the stiffness factor for that beam and SUM K is
the sum of the stiffness factors for adjacent beams.
d) After distributing the unbalance moment to each adjacent span, carry over half this
amount, with the same sign to the other end of each span. This completes one cycle of
distribution. If there are N cycles’s steps b & c must be repeated because of the new
unbalanced moment caused by the carry over moments. Such repetitions are made until
the carry over moments become zero. The process maybe stopped when any
distribution is completed. The accuracy of the final results ending on the no. of cycles.
Referring to program no 6 record from the figure
Let Ja = Moment acting on member AB
let Jb = Moment acting on member BA
let Jc = Moment acting on member BC
Let Jd = Moment acting on member CB
Let Je = Moment acting on member CD
Let Jf = Moment acting on member DC
Let Jg = Moment acting on member DE
At any cycle the accumulative moment is JA = JA + AC + AB
Jb = Jb + Bc + bb
Jc = Jc + cc + Cb
Jd = Jd + + Dc + Db For constant cross sections: K: = K1 = K2
Je = Je + Ec + Eb
Jf = Jf + Fc + Fb
Jg = Fde
58
COMPUTER OUTPUT
Upon input of numerical data’s computer first solves fixed end moments refer figure shown
on program no 6. The user put N = No of cycles and fixed end moments as numerical
input data’s, computer determines and prints on the screen unbalance, carryover moments
and accumulated end moments of last cycles. With end moments known, it solves shear
reactions at supports.

19, 1970 PRC NO: 10170
DESCRIPTION: ANALYSIS Three: Application to Concrete Design

Code)
TITLE: Moment Distribution Method CODE NAME: ANALYSIS Three
LIBRARY MODULE: Floppy Disk PROGRAM NAME: Analysis Three
W1/ft W2/FT
59
L1 L2 L3 L4
Shear Diagram
Moment Diagram
REFERENCE TEXTBOOK:
Wang
interpreted.

60
ANALYSIS Three: Is a computer program that determines the moments and shear reactions of
the figure as shown above. The program is good for three spans with a cantilever portion,
uniform loads, and concentrated loads located at any distance X from support is variable.
Span length and cross section variable see computer output for results (refer to figure
program record 6). The program is written in Basic Language and applicable to a wide variety
of programmable calculators and computers with peripheral attachments can be integrated
to E Review center.

Main program
If False Branch out

10 PRINT “This is computer program no 6 “Analysis of continuous beams and frames by the
moment distribution method”
20 PRINT” First let us consider three spans only with overhang. See drawing figure and program
record for reference”
25 PRINT “All units of force in Kips, Kips per foot, and linear dimensions in feet if all units are in
their respective units then run line no. 30”
30 REM First compute fixed end moments
40 DATA P1, A1, L1
50 DATA P2, A2, L2
60 DATA P3, A3, L3
65 DATA P4, A4, W4, L4
70 REM First for uniform loads a one dimensional array
680 DIM W (3)

61
90 DIM L (3)
80 INPUT “P1, L1, P2, L2, L3”:P1, L1, P2, L2, P3, L3
90 FW1 = 1/12*W1*L1^2
100 FW2 = 1/12*W2*L2^2
120 PW3 = 1/12*W3*L3^2
180 REM For concentrated loads
190 RESTORE 40
200 GOSUB 520
210 FP1 = Q1
220 RESTORE 50
230 GOSUB 620
240 FP2 = Q1
250 RESTORE 60
260 GOSUB 520
270 FP3 = Q1
280 RESTORE 40
290 GOSUB 570
300 FB1 = Q2
310 RESTORE 50
320 GOSUB 570
330 FB2 = Q2
340 RESTORE 60
350 GOSUB 570
360 FB3 = M2
62
370 FAB = FW1 + FP1
380 FBA = - (FW1 + FB1)
390 FBC = FW2 + FP2
400 FCB = - (FW2 + FB2)
410 FCD = FW3 + FP3
420 FDC + - (FW3 + FP3)
430 READ P4, A4, W4, L4
440 RESTORE 65
445 FDE = P4*A4 + W4*L4^2/2
450 PRINT TAB (2);”FAB=”; FAB;”Foot Kips”
460 PRINT TAB (12);”FBC=”; FBC;”Foot Kips”
470 PRINT TAB (16);”FCB=”; FCB;”Foot Kips”
480 PRINT TAB (18);”FCD=”;”Foot Kips”
490 PRINT TAB (20);”FDC=”; FDC;”Foot Kips”
500 PRINT TAB (25);”FDE=”; FDE;”Foot Kips”
455 PRINT TAB (8);”FBA=”; FBA” Foot Kips”
520 REM A sub routine one
530 READ Z, H, N *** Note Z, H, N stands for P, A, & L previously
540 Q1 = Z*H*(N – H)/N^2
550 RETURN
560 STOP
570 REM A sub routine no two
580 READ Z, H, N
590 Q2 = Z*H^2*(N – H)/N^2

63
600 STOP
610 PRINT “With fixed end moments computed input values for moment distribution method”
Start at program line no 1010
1010 CALL CLEAR
1020 PRINT “This is computer program no 6 moment distribution method in basic language
good for moment tables and accumulated moments at end of last cycle”
1030 PRINT” I can only tabulate all the carry over and balance moments however since my
visual display is limited to 14 program lines I can only display 5 to 6 cycles”
1040 PRINT”Input all fixed end moments previously computed in foot kips FAB, FBC, FCD, FCB,
FDC, FDE”
1050 PRINT” For figure and program description see program record no 6 if all data’s are
secured then run line no 1070”
1060 STOP
1070 REM Let the following symbols stands for carry over moments at AC, BC, CC, DC, EC, FC,
GC
1080 REM Let the following legends for balance moments at AB, BB, CB, DB, EB, FB, GB
1090 REM LET K1, K2, K3 & K4 as relative stiffness factors hand calculated
1100 INPUT” Fixed end moments” FAB, FBA, FBC, FCB, FDC, FCD FDE”: FAB, FBA, FBC, FCB,
FDC, FCD, FDE
1110 INPUT” Relative stiffness factors K1, K2, K3, K4”:K1, K2, K3, K4
1120 INPUT” How many cycles do you like N”: N
1140 LET X = 1
1145 PRINT “I am now performing cycle no =”; X
1150 REM Lock joint A
1160 BC = FBA
64
1165 CC = FBC
1170 REM Lock joint C
1180 DC = FCB
1190 EC = FCD
1200 LOCK Joint D
1210 FC = FDC
1220 GC = FDE
1230 REM Release Joint A
1240 A = AC
1250 GOSUB 600
1260 AB = C
1270 REM Release Joint B
1280 UB + BC + CC
1290 GOSUB 690
1300 BB = MBA
1310 CB = MBC
1320 REM Release Joint C
1330 UC = DC + EC
1340 GOSUB 790
1360 DB = MCB
1360 EB = MCD
1370 REM Release joint D
1372 IF X = 1 THEN 1374 ELSE 1378
1374 UD = FC + GC
65
1375 GOSUB 890
1376 Y = MDC
1377 GOTO 1380
1378 Y = -FC
1380 FB = Y
1420 JA = JA + AC + AB
1430 JB = JB + BC + + BB
1435 JC = JC + CC + CB
1440 JD = JD + DC + DB
1445 JE = JE + JE + EC + EB
1448 JF + JF + FC + FB
1450 JG = FDE
1460 IF N = 0 THEN 1461 ELSE 1470
1461 PRINT TAB (7); JA”Foot Kips”
1463 PRINT TAB (12); JB;”Foot kips”
1465 PRINT TAB (15); JC;”Foot Kips”
1466 PRINT TAB918); JD;”Foot Kips”
1467 PRINT TAB (21); JE;”Foot Kips”
1468 PRINT TAB (24); JF;”Foot Kips”
1464 PRINT TAB (27); JG;”Foot Kips”
1469 STOP
1470 Rem lock Joint A
1480 FAB = 1/2*BB
1490 FBA = 1/2*AB

66
1500 FBC + 1/2*DB
1510 REM Locke Joint C
1520 FCB = 1/2*CB
1530 FCD = 1/2*FB
1540 REM Lock Joint D
1550 FDC = 1/2*EB
1560 FDE = FDE
1570 X = X + 1
1580 PRINT “I am performing cycle no=”; X
1590 GOTO 1150
1595 STOP
1600 REM This is a sub routine no 1 determination of unbalance moment at joint A. First joint A
is held lock (i.e. degree of freedom is zero) then release (degree of freedom is set free)
1620 IF X>0 THEN 1630 ELSE 1640
1630 B = ABS (A)
1640 GOTO 1660
1650 B = -A
1660 C = B
1670 RETURN
1680 STOP
1690 REM This is sub routine no two. Determination and distribution of unbalance moment at
joint B (first joint B is held lock then release (degree of freedom is set free)
1700 IF UB>0 THEN 1710 ELSE 1730
1710 M = ABS (UB)

67
1720 GOTO 1740
1730 M = -UB
1740 MC = M
1750 MBA = K1/ (K1 + K2)*MC
1760 MBC = K2/ (K1 + K2)*MC
1770 RETURN
1780 STOP
1790 REM This is a sub routine no three. Determination and distribution of unbalanced
moment at joint C (first joint C is held lock degree of freedom is zero then release degree of
freedom is set free)
1800 IF UC>0 THEN 1810 ELSE 1830
1810 M = ABS (UC)
1820 GOTO 1840
1830 M = -UC
1840 MC = M
1850 MCB = K2/ (K2 + K3)*MC
1860 MCD = K3/ (K2 + K3)*MC
1870 RETURN
1880 STOP
1890 REM This is sub routine no four cyclic determination of unbalance moment at joint D (First
joint D is held lock degree of freedom is zero then release degree of freedom is set free)
1900 IF UD>0 THEN 1910 ELSE 1930
1910 M = ABS (UD)
1920 GOTO 1940
1930 M + -UD
68
1940 MC = M
1850 MDC = MC
1960 RETURN
1970 STOP
*** Start at program line no 2380 this time
2380 REM With end moments already computed determine shear reactions at supports
2390 REM Let RA, RB, RC, RD Total vertical reactions at support A, B, C, D respectively
2400 INPUT” Uniform loads in pounds per foot W1, W2, W3, W4”:W1, W2, W3, W4
2410 INPUT” Concentrated loads in pounds P1, P2, P3, P4”:P1, P2, P3, P4
2420 INPUT” Span length in feet L1, L2, L3, L4”:L1, L2, L3, L4
2430 INPUT” Distance of concentrated loads from support Y1, Y2, Y3, Y4”:Y1, Y2, Y3, Y4
2440 RA1 = (W1*L1^2/2 + P1*(L1 - Y1) – MBA)/1000*L1) in kips
2450 INPUT” Fixed end moments

MAB,MBA,MBC,,MCB,MCD,MDC”:MAB,MBA,MBC,MCB,MCD,MDC
2460 RA1 = (W1*LI^2/ (2*1000) + P1*(L1 –Y1)/1000 – MBA)/L1 Kips
2480 RB2 = (MBC – MCB) + W2*L2^2/2000 + P2 (L2 – Y2)/1000)/L2 Kips
2470 RB1 = (MBA + P1*Y1/1000 + W1*L1^2/2000)/L1 in kips
2490 RB = RB1 + RB2 Kips
2500 PRINT” Vertical shear reaction at support B=”; RB;” Kips
2445 PRINT” Vertical shear reaction at support A=”; RA1;”Kips
2510 RC1 = (MCB – MBC + P2*Y2/1000 + W2*L2^2/2000)/L2 Kips
2520 RC2 = (MCD – MDC + W3*L3/2000 + P3*(L3 – Y3)/1000)/L3 Kips

69
2530 RC = RC1 + RC2 Kips
2540 PRINT “Total vertical reaction at support C=”; RC;”Kips”
2550 REM Summation of forces vertical equals zero
2560 RD1 = (MDC – MC + W3*L3^2/2000 + P3*Y3)/1000/L3 Kips
2570 RD = RD1 + RD2 in kips
2580 PRINT” Total vertical shear reaction at support D=”; RD;”Kips”
2590 PRINT” Draw shear and moment diagram by hand and determine maximum positive
moment”
2600 PRINT” Programmed by Bienvenido C. David a civil/structural engineer on Jan 20, 1983 at
Baguio City”
2700 END
*** Call clear Resequence 10, 10 for correct numbering

70
70
In this chapter, elaborate discussion of concrete, the aggregates and steel reinforcement is given in
detail. The absolute volume computation by empirical formula and the equivalent numerical example is
given. A table for overload factors used in design is included for the convenience of the designer. The
analysis of:”Reinforced Concrete” is discussed in detail, at the end of the chapter; a summary
treatment of both W.S.D. and U.S.D. format is included. This chapter will serve as an introduction to the
succeeding chapters in the book For Engineers who have a limited time, a review of
chapter three will serve as a refresher course in “Reinforced Concrete”.
INTRODUCTION
The structural Engineering profession has grown tremendously in the last twenty
years. The accelerated development of the digital computer and their expanding
application to structural engineering profession have a tremendous impact on
handling the analytical and design task encountered. With the availability of the
digital computer, the practitioner is able to use classical theories whenever
appropriate, even though large amount of simultaneous equations maybe
involved.
71
Today the “Structural Engineering” is involved in many Engineering projects; in the Civil
Engineering field, he assists the Transportation Engineer, Hydraulic Engineer and Sanitary
Engineer by providing the structures needed to implement their projects. In building
construction, he is one of the principal collaborators of the Architect. In the mechanical,
Electrical and mechanical field, he is responsible for the designing the heavy machineries
required or facilities required for their projects. He may shift his entire activity into naval
architecture and become a specialist in the design of ship structures. In aerospace engineering,
he maybe involve in providing special structures for launching space vehicles. Where design of a
structure; such as a large dam or large industrial facility, he may provide the leadership for
undertaking the project.
“Structural mechanics” is the main tool used in Structural Engineering”. Subjects such as
“Engineering mechanics”, “Strength of Materials”, Theory of Structures” are only
a part of such wide field activity in the structural science. Recent development s includes shells
and plates, finite pieces and the law of continuum mechanics.
Before the advent of the digital computer, the classical method of “Structural Analysis” is
usually employed at that time, the available calculating machine is the slide rule followed by
the more precise scientific calculator.
However in the late 1970 and earl’s 1980; a new development in the field of computation
appeared worldwide, known today as the digital computer, thus with this new innovation, new
methods of “Structural Analysis” were developed; one such development is known as
“Systematic Structural Analysis” or simply the “Finite Element method”. This
new method employs “Matrix algebra as its main mathematical tools.
72
Difference between Classical and Systematic Analysis
Classical analysis uses the standard method of manipulating the desired unknowns in a given
structure. Geometry and algebra are the analytical used in this method, whereas in the
systematic analysis Matrix algebra is the main tools used. In erecting a structure there are three
phases involved. The planning stage, the design phase and the construction stage. In our case
our concerned will be part two the design phase particularly “Design of Reinforced Structures”.
In analogous to “Structural Analysis”, there are two methods employed in the design phase, the
standard procedure and the systematic procedure.
The standard procedure is analogous to classical Structural analysis where algebra and the
geometry of the structure is the main analytical used. Systematic procedure is analogous to
Systematic Structural Analysis”, however there is a difference between the two; while in
systematic structural analysis one is forced to use arrays while in systematic design procedure
logical steps is the method employed. As a rule then we can put it this way “matrix algebra” for
Systematic Structural Analysis” and Boolean algebra for “Systematic Design procedure”
From the above discussion, we can summarize it in three steps
1 Mastery of the subject defined (i.e. Reinforced Concrete
2 Knowledge of any computer’s language (i.e. Basic, Fortran and Sol or Sql)
3, Transforming the standard method into computer language.
The last step is probably the most difficult to accomplish. Sometimes this requires formula
derivations, evaluation of units and evaluating numerical constants. The need for such
transformation is essential for computer application, one step three is accomplished and feed
into the computer, the resulting results is the same as the standard procedure.
73
WHYS IS SYSTEMATIC STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS IMPORTANT
The answer to this question is time element. Computer is a modern approach to “Structural
Analysis”; rather than bogging yourself with slide rule, opening up charts and tables we can
concentrate on Engineering design. Second unlike human beings, computers seldom commit
errors thus the numerical values obtained are précised and the third reason is speed,
sometimes Civil or particularly “Structural Engineers demands that we meet deadlines,
without these machines ; teams of Engineers would be needed to do the manual
computations thus lengthening the time between design and final design.
SUMMARY TREATMENT
Design Behavior and Philosophy
CONCRTE: Is an artificial stone that is cast in place in a plastic condition. Its essential
ingredients are cement and water, which reacts with each other chemically to form another
material having useful strength.
AGRGGREGATES: One of the principal composition of concrete, the other being cement. The
fine aggregate is composed of sand and the course aggregate is gravel or crushed stone.
CEMENT: Cement is the principal composition of concrete, briefly it’s made by mixing and
then burning to incipient fusion, the two materials, one composed principally of lime, the
other being clay or argillaceous material containing silica, alumina and iron.
ADMIXTURE: Substances added to concrete to improve its workability, accelerates its set,
hardens its surface, increase its waterproofing qualities.
74
REINFORCEMENT: Steel bars for reinforcement in concrete are made from billet steel and rail
steel. The three grades of billet steel are structural, intermediate and hard. Manufacturers give
different specifications for different brands of steel.
ABSOLUTE VOLUME AND DESIGN MIXTURE: It has been custom to express the relative
quantities of the concrete ingredients by bulk volume, in this order: cement, sand, stone.
For example a 1:2:4 mix signifies that, for every cubic foot of cement, 2 cubic foot of sand and
4 cubic foot of gravel are to be used. Important conversions as follows.
1 Cubic Ft. = 7.48 Galloons 1 Cu Yard = 27 Cubic Ft.
1 Cubic foot of water weighs 62.4 Lbs 1 Gallons of water weighs 8.35 Lbs
A sack of Portland cement is assumed to have a volume of 1 Cu.Foot and weighs 94 Lbs
Specific gravity of cement is 3.10 and that of aggregates is 2.65
COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH: Depending on the mix especially the water cement ratio and the
time and quality of curing, compressive strength of concrete can be attained up to 14000 P.S.I.
or more. an ordinary aggregate is usually in the 3000 p.s.i. to 5000 p.s.i.
TENSILE STRENGTH: The tensile strength of concrete is relatively low, about 10 – 20 % of the
compressive strength of lightweight concrete, but not at all cases, has a lower strength that
ordinary weight of concrete.
A.C.I. CODES SPECIFICATIONS, ANALYSIS AND FORMULA DERIVATIONS
ULTIMATE STRENGTH: From investigation and experimental results, it has been found out that
at or near ultimate , stress are no longer proportional to strain, thus the general working stress
theory based on elastic analysis is no longer applicable.
75
Test conducted at Lehigh university and University of Illinois indicates that at higher loads axial
and bending moments adhere closely to the ultimate strength theory which is the main
alternative procedure now used in “structural design practice.”
TYPICAL FORMULAS USED IN ULTIMATE STRENGTH DESIGN
1. Cu = 0.85abfc’ 2. Tu = Asfy 3. w =
4. a = 1.18wd 5. c = 1.18wd For two way slab design only
6. Mu = AsFy(d – ) 7. Mu = bd2Fc’w(1 – 0.59w)
8. Mu = AsFyd(1 – 0.59w)
9. As = bdFc’ - (bdFc’)2 – 2bFc’Mu/
Fy
10. 10 Cb = (d) 11 Pb = 0.85B1( )(87000/(87000 + Fy)
12 Wb = ,85B1 (87000/(87000 + Fy) P (1 ± 1 – 2.622Mu/(bd2Fc’) )
for two slab design

76
*** Note given d, b and Mu depth of stress rectangular block is
–
a=d ± d2 For Computer application
STRENGTH REDUCTION FACTORS IN A.C.I CODE 1977 & 1983
KIND OF STRENGTH REDUCTION

FACTOR
Flexural with or without axial tention .90
Axial Tention ,90
Axial compression, with or without flexure .80
Members with spiral reinforcements .70
Other reinforced members .70
Except that for low values of axial load,
For members in which Fy does not exceed 60,000 p.s.i., with symmetrical
reinforcement, maybe taken as 0.90 as n decreases from 0.10 fc’Ag to
zero.
For others reinforced members,
from .10fc’Ag or Pnb,
whichever is smaller, to zero
Shear and torsion .85
Bearing on concrete .70
Flexure in plain concrete .65
77
Factored - load combinations for determining required strength in A.C.I. code
Dead load D plus Live load L 1.4D + 1.7L

Dead + Live + wind Load W when additive .75(1.4D + 1.7L +
1.7W)
Same as item 2 when gravity counteracts wind – loads effects .9D + 1.3W
In structures designed for earthquake loads or forces E, replace W by 1.1 E
in items 2, and 3.
When lateral earth pressure H acts in addition to gravity forces when 1.4D + 1.7L + 1.7H
effects are additive
Same as item 5 when gravity counteracts earth pressure effects .9D + 1.7H
Reference textbooks
Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures 9th Edition By George Winter & Arthur Nielsen
Reinforced Concrete Fundamentals By Phil M Ferguson
The Theory and practice of Reinforced concrete 4rth Clarence w Dunham
edition By
Simplified Design of reinforced Concrete By Parker
Foundation Engineering By Peck And Hanson
Foundation Analysis and design 3rd Edition Joseph Bowles
A.C.I. Code of practice 1977 & 1983
78
INTRODUCTION:
In this chapter three types of “Reinforced concrete beams will be discussed, namely the design
of “Single Reinforced Beam”, design of “Double Reinforced Beam and the third one “Design
of Tee Beam”.
The author discussed in details the analysis for each type of beam. Formula derivations have
been derived for computer applications. Design steps and A.C.I code provisions; legends have
been included to understand the program steps involve. Basic theory and analysis shown in the
figure below is a guide for deriving formulas to be used in the programs presented in the
succeeding topics.
LEGENDS DESCRIPTION OF LEGENDS

Fc’ Cylinder strength of concrete at ultimate in Kips per square inch
Fy Ultimate yield strength of steel in kips per square inch
As Area of tention steel in square inches
b Width of beam in inches
d Depth of beam distance from centroid tention steel up to outer concrete fiber stress.
P Steel reinforcement ratio

Pb Balanced steel reinforcement ratio from code
Pm Maximum steel reinforcement ratio from code = 0.75pb
79
Pn Minimum steel reinforcement ratio from code = 200/fy

Es Modulus of elasticity of steel in pounds per square inch, given
ec Strain of concrete at ultimate = 0.003 at failure
Es Strain of steel = 6fs/Es = fs/29,000,000 at failure
B1 Concrete stress block parameter
Moment workmanship factor usually equals to 0.90
Pd Design moment = Pn
Md Design moment = Mn
Pn Nominal axial load`
Mn Nominal axial moment
The above notations conform to the latest 1977 A.C.I. code and will be used thru
out this book. The analysis of a “Reinforced Concrete Beam” can be visualized
well based from the figure below.
ec .85fc’
⃝ ⃝ ⃝ c es’ a Cc
d As d h N.A (d - a/2)
⃝ ⃝ ⃝ es (d – c) Ts
Figure 1 Cross section Figure 2 Strain diagram Figure 3 Stress block diagram
From the strain diagram as shown above and by similarity of triangles, the distance c for balance
eccentricity, let the symbol cb = distance of N.A. from the outer fiber concrete then for simultaneous
failure of steel and concrete, substitute the strain of concrete = 0.003 and strain of steel equals
es = fs/29x106 in the strain diagram then Cb = (ec/ (es + ec) d
Cb = (.003)/(fs/Es + 0 .003) d = (0.003/ (fy/29x106 + 0.003) d
Cb = 87/ (fy + 87) d Equation (1)
But Cb is also equals to (Pb) (fy)/B1fc’ (d) Equation (2)

80
Equating (1) and (2) we get (87)/ (fy + 87) d = (Pb) (fy)/B1fc’ (d) solving for Pb
we get
Pb = (B1)(fc’)/fy(87/(fy + 87)) Equation (4) This equation is known as the balance steel
reinforcement ratio from code , the factor B1is a Para meter that relates the depth of the of
equivalent rectangular stress block to the depth of the actual neutral axis.. The factor B1is
equals to 0.85 for fc’ 4000 psi and decreases by 0.005 for every 1000 psi above 4000 psi to a
minimum of 0.65. The code specifies the steel maximum steel ratio shall not exceed 0.75pb
and a minimum of pn = 200/fy
From the figure applying = 0 .85fc’ab = Asfy or solving for As = Eq (3)
or solving the depth of stress rectangular block a = Eq (4)
in terms of steel reinforcement ratio p As = p (b) (d) Eq (5)
Taking moments about centroid compression concrete block
MN = Asfy (d – a/2) Eq (8) from Eq (5) substitute the value of As in (8) we get
Md = (p) (b) (d) (fy) (d – ) simplifying further we have
Md = (p) (b) (d) (fy) (1 – )
Equation 3, 4, 5 can be used to solve any required unknowns a, As, or p
There are many techniques in designing a beam. one method is to assume the
depth of stress rectangular block a then compute the area of steel then checked
the assumed value of a by recomputing the new depth of stress rectangular
block a. . If the computed depth of stress rectangular block a does not coincide
with the first assumption then a second trial a will be performed, the process goes
81
on until the correct value of a is obtained. Design experience indicates that a

value of a from 1/3 to 1/2 of depth is a good assumption.
The second method is thru the use of the steel reinforcement ratio from graph,
the mathematical expression Mu/ d2 is evaluated first and from the graph the
equivalent steel reinforcement ratio is selected. The above techniques are useful
if there are only few beams to design. In the second method, if the evaluated
mathematical expression Mu/ d2 is too small, it is difficult to read the steel
±reinforcement ratio p from graph, besides the two methods discussed is not
applicable for a micro computer solution. we therefore derived a formula for
finding the depth of stress rectangular block in terms of material strength
specifications, external moment Mu and dimension of beam in inches. In a
similar manner, it is more convenient to express a direct formula for area of steel
As in terms of material strength specifications, external moment Mu and beam
dimension b & d. Likewise for steel reinforcement ratio. The reasons for such
derivations are the need for computer application. In the following programs, we
2
often encountered the mathematical expression a = d ± d – and
As = this is just one example how the author use this mathematical
formula to solve area of steel at any section along the beam by a micro computer
solution. The other formula is useful both for beam design and slab design, the
mathematical expression for p is equals to p = ( 1 ± 2.622(Mu)/bd2) and
for the direct formula for As using the refined but less accurate formula for As
bdFc’ ± (bdFc’)2 – 2bFc’Mu/
As = fy
In our general computer program , we use the standard sequence for solving the area of
steel at the supports and midspan, however by using the author’s derived formula for As and
steel reinforcement ratio p, we can treat the mathematical expression as a sub routine program
within the main program.
82
INTRODUCTION
Most common type of structures has a cross section composed of single reinforced beams. This means
that the top section of the beam above neutral axis is in compression and the lower section below the
●●neutral axis is in tention where the placement of steel bars is usually located. Code specifications as
listed in chapter 3 will be used. In addition design of diagonal tention (stirrups) using the less accurate
A.C.I code is integrated in this design.
ANALYSIS AND FORMULAS DERIVATIONS FOR COMPUTER APPLICATIONS
c
.85Fc’ ec
d d
● ●
b es (d-c)
Cross section Pressure diagram Strain diagram
From the figure a single reinforced concrete beam, it is evident that AsFy = Cc
where Cc = 0.85Fc’ (a) (b) or solving for As = Eq (1) Taking moments
about centroid of compressive concrete block we get Mu = AsFy (d – a/2) Eq (2)
here is the moment reduction factor which is equals to 0.90
substituting the values of As in (2) we have
Mu = (.90) (Fy) (0.85Fc’b (a) (d – a/2) or simplifying further we get

83
Mu = = 0.85(Fc’) (b) (ad –a2/2) or = ad – a2/2
= = a2 – 2ad adding d2 to both sides of the equations. We have
2 2 2
+ d = a -2ad + d or d2 - = (a – d)2
Extracting square roots of both sides we get and transposing we get the formula
for solving the depth of stress rectangular block a =
–
In this equation we take the smaller value of a. The following formula is useful for
computer application given Mu as bending moment, d as depth of beam and Fc’
and Fy as material strength specifications **** Note author use this mathematical
expression as sun routine programs for solving required depth of stress
rectangular block at any section.
Following the same analysis we get the following formula for the area of steel As
As = (b)(d) ± (0.7225Fc’2b2d2)/Fy2 – 1.888Fc’(b)(Mu)/Fy2))
The above formula is for direct computer application . A more refined but less
conservative formula in lieu of the above formula can be used is given as
84
9. As = bdFc’ - (bdFc’)2 – 2bFc’Mu/
Fy
IMPORTANT DESIGN STEPS
U.S.D. ALTERNATIVE
1 PB = .85B1 ( ) where B1 -.85 for Fc’ = 4000 psi and decreases 0.05
for every 1000 psi above 4000.00 but not less than 0.65
2) Limit of Pb from code = .75Pb Pmax = 0.75Pb where Pb is the balance steel
reinforcement ratio from code. Given the area of steel as and dimension of beam
b, d & h a- depth of stress rectangular block is a = or in terms of steel
reinforcement ratio from code p a = nominal flexural strength is
Mn = AsFy(d – a/2) in terms of steel reinforcement ratio p
Mn = p(Fy)(b)(d)2( 1 - .59p ) with a value of = .90 as workmanship factor for

moment we let Md =Design moment then
Md = p(Fy)(b)(d)2( 1 - .59p ) the code limits Pmin = 200/Fy
Note for computer application use author derives formula a depth of stress
rectangular block.
a =± d2 – where M is in inch kips Fc’ = K.P.S.I

85
Note the quantity d2 – must not be less than zero take lower
positive real root of a
LEGENDS
LEGENDS DESCRIPTION
Fy Yield strength of steel at ultimate in Kips Per Square Inch
Fc Cylinder strength of concrete at ultimate
CA coefficients of moments at support a
CB Coefficient of moment at support b
CC Coefficient of moment at support c
CU Largest coefficient of moment for solving depth of beam
N Percentage of steel ratio i.e. designer’s choice
LC Clear distance of beam in feet.
LL Live loads in pounds
DL Dead load in pounds
1.4 Dead load factor at ultimate
1.7 Live load factor at ultimate
Diagonal factor taken as 0.85
Note for more detail discussion please refer “Design of Reinforced Concrete
Structures” by Clarence W Dunham or George Winter
Other reference books listed below
Reinforced Concrete Fundamentals By Phil M Ferguson

The Theory and practice of Reinforced concrete Clarence w Dunham
4rth edition By
Simplified Design of reinforced Concrete By Parker
86

19, 1970 PRC NO: 10170
DESCRIPTION: Design of Single Reinforced Concrete Beam

Code)
TITLE: Single Reinforced Concrete Beam CODE NAME: CON BEAM
LIBRARY MODULE: Floppy Disk PROGRAM NAME: Con Beam PTR
NO: 3236392 at Bagiuo City 01/10/1984
CA = 1/9WL2, CB = 1/14WL2, CC = 1/16WL2

If .C.I. code is applicable w/ Ft in pounds
LC
Distance c from N.A
eu .85fc’
● ● ● ● ● ● a
d h N.A
● ● ● es AsFy
B B B
EXTERIOR SUPPORT MIDSPAN INTERIOR SUPPORT STRESS & STRAIN DIAGRAM
87
REFERENCE TEXTBOOK:
Design of Concrete CHAPTER 4 PAGES 112 - 117
Structures By George
Winter 9th edition
interpreted.
CON – BEAM: Is a computer program that determines the size, steel reinforcement and
diagonal tension bars of a single reinforced concrete beam. With given live loads and assume
width of beam, computer first determines height of beam, dead load of section is automatically
computed, computes areas of reinforcement steel at interior support, midspan & exterior
support all in conformity with A.C.I. code 1977 & 1983 specifications. Checks whether section is
adequate for shear. Design stirrups required and spacing at any desired locations X distance
from column face. The program is written in Advance Basic and can be feed to a wide variety of
programmable calculators and micro computers.

If true branch out

Main program
If false
88
PROGRAM STATEMENT NUMERICAL

PROGRAM OUTPUT *** For
LINE NO debugging
purposes only
sample only
10 CALL CLEAR
20 PRINT “ This is design of continues beam by
U.S.D. method in English units”
25 PRINT” For legends and drawings refer to
program record and program description”
30 PRINT” This program was developed by
Bienvenido C. David a civil/structural engineer”
35 PRINT” All material strength specifications in
Kips per square Inch, Live loads in pounds per
foot, Linear dimension in feet”
40 PRINT” If all data’s are in their respective units
then run line no 60"
50 STOP
60 INPUT” Width of beam in inches”;B 16
65 INPUT” Percentage of steel ratio N”:N 1
*** Note here N depends on the designer choice
70 INPUT” Live load in Kips per SQUARE ft”:LL 4310
75 INPUT” Cylinder strength of concrete at 3
ultimate”:FC
80 INPUT” Yield strength of steel at ultimate FY”:FY 40
85 INPUT” Length of beam in feet”:LC 20
90 INPUT” Coefficient of negative moment at .07143
support A”:CA
95 INPUT’Coeffecients of positive moment at 0.111111
center span”:CB
100 INPUT”Coeffecients of negative moment at 0.0625
support C”:CC
89
105 INPUT”Coeffecients of maximum shear reaction

at support CR for VU max”:CR support CR for VU
max”:CR
110 INPUT”Coeffecients of maximum moment for 0.11111
solving depth of beam CU”:CU
120 IF FC≥4 THEN 130 ELSE 150
130 BA = 0.85
140 GOTO 160
150 BA = 0.85 – (FC – 4)/1*(.05) BA = .85 sample
only
160 PB = 0.5418758*FC/FY*87/(87 + FY)*BA .0236694
170 PC = N*PB .0236694
190 PM = 0.2/FY .005
200 IF PC<=PM THEN 220
210 IF PC>PM THEN 240
220 P = PM 0.005
230 GOTO 250
240 P = PC .0236643
250 X = 1 – 0.59*P*(FY/FC) 0.8138408
260 Y = 0.90*P*FY*B 13.630637
270 G = X*Y 11.093169
280 E = 83.33*G/(CU*LC^2) 20.79
290 F = -1.456*B -23.296
300 C = -(3.64*B + 1.7*LL) -7,385.24
310 Q = (F^2 -4*E*C)^.5 784.2343
320 D = (-F + Q)/(2*E) 19.211087
330 H = D + 2.5 21.91087
335 PRINT” Height of beam in inches =”;H;”Inches”
340 REM Compute areas of steel at supports and
midspan
350 DL = 1.456*B*H 510.4356
355 LL = 1.7*LL 7,327
360 W = DL + LL 7837.436
370 MA = 3/250*CA*W*LC^2 2687.174
375 IF (D^2-2.61*MA/(FC*B))<0 THEN 385 ELSE 395
385 PRINT” Depth of stress rectangular block is not
90
possible a is imaginary review given data”

390 STOP
395 AA = D – (D^2-2.61*MA/(FC*B)).5 4.223156
400 AE = MA/(.90*FY*(D-AA/2)) 4.314843
405 PRINT” Area of steel at exterior
support=”AE;”Square Inches”
410 REM For positive steel at center span
415 MB = 3/250*CB*W*LC^2 4179.548
420 IF (D^2 – 2.61*MB/(FC*B))<0 THEN 425 ELSE
435
425 PRINT” Depth of stress rectangular block at
center is not possible review given data”
430 STOP
435 AB = D –(D^2-2.61*MB/(FC*B))^.5 7.183078
440 ASP = MB/(.90*FY*(D-AB/2)) 7.339031
445 PRINT” Area of steel at midspan=”ASP;”Sq Inch”
450 REM For steel at interior support
460 MC = 3/250*CC*W*LC^2 2351.231
465 IF (D^2-2.61*MC/(FC*B))<0 THEN 470 ELSE 480
470 PRINT” Depth of stress rectangular block at
interior support is imaginary not possible review
given data”
475 STOP
480 AC = D-(D^2-2.61*MC/(FC*B))^.5 3.633238
495 ASI = MC/(.90*FY*(D-AC/2)) 3.7121
500 PRINT” Area of steel at interior
support=”;ASI;”Sq.Inch”
510 PRINT” Select from tables size and bar no then
type continue and press enter to resume
running”
520 BREAK
530 REM Design of diagonal tention using the less
accurate A.C.I. code
540 VU = CR*W*LC/2000 79.299
545 VCA = 0.053754*FC^.5*B*D 34.83
550 IF VU<=VCA THEN 555 ELSE 580
555 PRINT” Section adequate for diagonal tention
91
no stirrups needed in this region just provide

extra diagonal tention for unforeseen loads or
as directed by field Engineer”
560 PRINT” Programmed by Bienvenido C. David A
Civil/Structural engineer on February 16, 1981”
565 STOP
580 580 REM Stirrups needed in this region let us
use U shape stirrups
590 VCD = VU – VCA 44.469
600 J = 1000*VU/W 10
610 JA = 0.5*CR*VCA*LC/VY 4.39
620 Z = J - JA 5.61
630 ZA = 0.187*FY*D/VCD 3.93
635 Rem Let’s take an increment of every 1 feet
distance from support
640 PRINT” Point of zero excess shear from support
location where stirrups are needed is
=”;Z;”feet”
645 REM For every 1 feet interval
650 FOR S = 1 TO Z STEP 1
660 Z1 = ZA*Z/(Z-S)
670 PRINT”Recqired spacing at 1 feet interval is
=”;Z1;”Feet”
680 NEXT S
690 PRINT”Programed by Bienvenido C. David A
Civil/Structural engineer on February 1982 at
Baguio City”
700 END
92
INTRODUCTION
The name compression beam is analogous to double reinforced beam.

When the capacity of a given cross section the compressive force of concrete is less
than the maximum external moment, then steel reinforcement is needed in that
part of the beam in which the stresses are compressive to supplement the
concrete in resisting compressive stresses. Beams containing reinforcement
for both tension and compression are known as double reinforced
beam.
Double reinforced beam arises when computed dimensions of single

reinforced beam is not possible for architectural reasons, thus the only
alternative is to analyze the given beam as double reinforced beam.
In recent years, due to the development of high strength materials, compression

beam is seldom used. however there are still situations in which use of double
reinforced beam is the only alternative.
Our analysis will be based entirely on the U.S.D. method
ANALYSIS AND FORMULA DERIVATIONS
b eu
● ● ● d’ As’
Ast Neutral Axis d – d’ d h
● ● ● d es Astfy
Asc
CROSS SECTION STRAIN DIAGRAM CROSS SECTION WITH COMPRESSION
BEAM
93
b a
h (d-d’) .85fc’
(d – a/2)
(As – As’)
PRESSURE DIAGRAM
Let us consider the figure below. In the analysis of compression beam if Pmax = 0.75Pbor less
than Pb then equations of single reinforced beam is valid, conversely if P is greater than Pmax
then somewhat difference analysis is required. The following nomenclature will be used for
double reinforced concrete beam.
d’ = Covering of top bars reckoned from centroid compression steel up to outer fiber of
concrete.
d = Depth of beam (I.E distance of centroid tention steel up to outer fiber of concrete).
d – d’ = Lever arm of couple Ts and Cs’
b = Width of the beam given
h = height of the beam
fc’ = Cylinder strength of concrete in Kips per square inch.
fy = Yield strength of steel at ultimate in kips per square inch.
As’ =Area of compression steel in square inches
a = Depth of stress rectangular block
By the superposition method, the total resisting moment is equals to the sum of the individual
moments namely Mn -1 moment provided by the couple consisting of the force in compression
steel As’ and the force equal to the area of tention steel, then from the figure
94
Mn – 1 = As’(fy)(d – d’) We call this equation (1)

The second part Mn – 2 = is the contribution of the remaining tention steel (As – As’) acting
with the compression concrete with a lever arm of (d – a/2) so that Mn – 2 = (As –As’)(fy)(d –
a/2). In analogous to single reinforced concrete beam the depth of stress rectangular block is
given by As – As’ or a = we call this equation (3) but by definition As =
pbd and As’ = p’bd
substituting in (3) we get a = The total resisting moment then would be
Mn = Mn – 1 + Mn – 2 = (As – As’)(fy)(d – a/2) + As’(fy)(d – d’) introducing a factor as

reduction factor then the design moment would be
Md = = – – + –Equation (4)
Equation 4 is the design moment for double reinforced concrete beam. For allowable steel
reinforcement ratio from code see program name comp beam.
In our computer program, upon input of numerical data’s. Computer first analyze given section.
A visual display into the monitor screen the word “ This is double reinforced” or “Single
reinforced beam”. A break command temporarily stops the computer from running to let the
designer sketch the section. Upon entry of the command CONTINUE computer resumes
running, evaluates required area of steel at midspan and supports respectively all in accordance
with the 1977 and 1983 A.C.I code.
STEPS FOR COMPUTER APPLICATION
a= or in terms of steel reinforcement ratio a =
The limiting value of lim = .85B1( )( )( ) + P’
where P’ = As’/bd for balanced steel ratio B = B + P’Fs’/Fy
Maximum steel ratio permitted by code is max = 0.75 PB + P’Fs/Fy and the nominal
moment is Md = (0.85Fc’ab(d – a/2)) + As’Fs’(d – d’) here = .90
95
Fy Yield stress of steel at ultimate in K.S.I
Fc = Cylinder strength of concrete in K.S.I.
b = Dimension of beam in inches CA = Coefficient of moment at exterior support
CB = Coefficient of moment at midspan
CC = Coefficient of moment at interior support
N = Percentage of steel ratio B1 is taken as 0.85 for 4000 psi and decreases for every 1000 psi
above 4000 psi.

19, 1970 PRC NO: 10170
DESCRIPTION: Design of Double Reinforced Concrete Beam

Code)
TITLE: Double Reinforced Concrete Beam CODE NAME: COMP BEAM
MACHINE LANGUAGE : IBM BASICA COMPUTER: I.B.M Home
Computer Program steps: 120
LIBRARY MODULE: Floppy Disk PROGRAM NAME: Comp Beam PTR
NO: 3235345 at Bagiuo City 02/11/1983
96
DRAWING / FIGURE CODE NAME: COMP - BEAM
W in LBS per foot
A B C
A B C
● ● ● ● ● ●
h ASc h ASt h ASc
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
SECTION A – A SECTION B – B SECTION C - C
b a eu
es’
h (d-d’) .85fc’
(d – a/2) es
(As – As’)
PRESSURE DIAGRAM STRAIN DIAGRAM
REFERENCE TEXTBOOK: Dean Peabody Jr.Reinforced Concrete Design

97
interpreted.
COMP – BEAM: Is a computer PROGRAM that designs and analyze whether a given beam is
singly reinforced or or double reinforced. Computer first checked capacity of given section
compares moment capacity to actual moment and designs required area of steel at midspan ,
exterior support , interior support in square inch, using the less accurate A.C.i code. It
determines whether section is adequate for dia gonal tension or not all following the provisions
of the 1977 or 1988 A.C.I code. Evaluates spacing of stirrups The program is written in Advance
Basic and can be feed to a wide variety of programmable calculators and micro computers as
well as E- Review Center.

If true branch out

Main program
If false
98
PROGRAM PROGRAM STATEMENT COMPUTER OUTPUT

LINE NO FOR DEBUGGING ONLY
10 CALL CLEAR
20 PRINT” This is a program for double reinforced beam
design by U.S.D. method in English units”
30 PRINT” This programmed was developed by

Bienvenido C. David a Civil?Structural engineer”
35 PRINT” For drawing and program record please see
attached sheets”
40 PRINT” All material strength specifications in Kips per
Square Inch, Linear dimensions in inches, Live loads
in pounds per foot”
45 PRINT” If all datas are in their consistent units then
run line 60”
50 STOP
60 REM A program for compression beam
70 INPUT” Material strength FC,FY”:FC,FY 3.5, 40
75 INPUT” Live loads in pounds per foot”:LL 3000
80 INPUT” Width and height of beam B,H”:B,H 12, 18
85 INPUT” Shear react ion factor at support CR”:CR 1.15
90 INPUT”Coeffecients of negative moments at face of .0625,.0714285,0.111111
exterior support, midspan, interior support
CA,CB,CC”:CA,CB,CC
100 INPUT “Clear distance of beam in feet LC”:LC 20
120 REM Determine if given section is single reinforced
or double reinforced
130 D = H-4 14
140 IF FC=<4 THEN 150 ELSE 170
150 BA = 0.85
160 GOTO 180
170 BA = 0.85–((FC-4)/1*).05 .85
180 PB = 0.541875*FC/FY*87*BA/(87+FY) 0.0276084
190 AS = PB*B*(H-4) 4.63
200 A = AS*FY/(0.85*FC*FY*B) 5.1968
210 MD = 0.90*AS*FY*(D-A/2) 1900.4853
220 DL = 1.0466*B*H 226 POUNDS PER FEET
230 W = 1.4*DL + 1.7*LL 741.4 Pounds per foot
240 MA = 3/250*CA*W*LC^2 222 kips
99
250 MB = 3/250*CB*W*LC^2 254 Kips

260 MC = 3/250*CC*W*LC^2 395.37 Kips
270 IF A>MB THEN 300
280 IF MB>MC THEN 330
290 GOTO 350
300 IF MA>MC THEN 310
310 MU = MA
320 GOTO 360
330 MU MB
340 GOTO 360
350 MU = MC
360 IF MU<=MD THEN 380
370 IF MU.MD THEN 810
380 REM Assume dimension okay for design no revision
necessary. Determine area of steel bars at support
and midspan.
385 REM Let AE area of steel at exterior support
390 IF (d^2-2.61*MA/(FC*B))<0 THEN 395 ELSE 405
395 PRINT” Depth of stress rectangular block results in
imaginary not possible review given data”
400 STOP
405 A1 = D-SQR(D^2-2.61*MA/(FC*B)) 0.5016932
410 AE = MA/(0.90*FY*(D-A/2)) 0.4485 Square Inch
415 PRINT”Recquired area of steel at exterior support 0.4485
t=”:AE”Square inch”
420 REM Let ASP Required area of steel at mid span
425 IF (D^2-2.61*MB/(FC*B))>0 THEN 430 ELSE 450

430 PRINT” Depth of stress rectangular block is imaginary
not possible review given data”
440 STOP
445 A2 = D- (D^2-2.61*MB/(FC*B))^.5 0.575555
450 ASP = MB/(0.90*FY*(D-A2/2) 0.5145449 Square Inch
455 PRINT”Recquired area of steel at
midspan=”;ASP;”Square Inches”
460 REM Let S1 area of steel at interior support
470 IF (D^2-2.61*MC/(FC*B))<0 THEN 475 ELSE 485
480 STOP
485 A3 =D – SQR(D^2-2.61*MC/(FC*B)) 0.9059719
490 ASI = MC/(0.90*FY*(D-A3/2)) .810695
495 PRINT”Recquired area of steel at interior support
100
=”;ASI;”Square Inches”
500 PRINT” Select from tables appropriate bar size no.
and then type continue to resume running and press
enter”
505 BREAK
510 REM Design of diagonal tension
512 VU = CR8W/2000*LC 2.875
513 VCA = 0.053754*FC^.5*B*D 16.8948 Kips
515 IFVCA=>VU THEN 530
520 PRINT” Section safe for shear stress just provide
stirrups for unforeseen loads or as directed by Field
Engineer”
525 PRINT” Programmed by Bienvenido C. David A
Civil/Structural Engineer”
528 STOP
530 REM Design of diagonal tension needed in this region
540 VCD = VU – VCA
550 J = 1000*VU/W
560 JA = 0.5*CR*VCA*LC/VU
570 ZA = .187*FY*D/VCD
580 PRINT” Point of zero excess shear is =”;Z;”Feet
distance from support stirrups needed in this region”
590 REM Let us consider 2 Ft. interval
600 FOX = 1 TO Z STEP 2
610 Z1 = ZA*Z/(Z-X)
620 PRINT”Recquired spacing at 2 Ft. interval is
=”;Z1;”Inches”
630 NEXT X
640 PRINT” Detail and sketch section”
650 PRINT “Programmed by Bienvenido C. David a
Civil/Structural Engineer in Baguio City on April
29,1983”
660 STOP
810 REM This is a double reinforced beam
820 M1 = MU-MD 939.765
840 AS1 = M1/(0.90*FY*(D-2.5)) 4.5893719
850 AT = AS1 + AS 9.21937
860 P1 = AS1/(B*D) 0.0273176
870 PC = 0.85*BA*FC/FY*2.5/D*87/(87- FY) + P1 0.0482143
880 P2 = AT/(B*D) 0.020896
885 REM Compare P2 and PC
890 PRINT”Recquired area of steel at interior support
=”;AT;”SQUARE Inches”
101
900 PRINT” Compare P2 and PC allowable steel ratio from

code
910 PRINT” Area of steel at exterior support can be taken
as equals to area of steel at interior support”
930 PRINT” Area of steel at exterior support
=”;AT;”Square Inches”
935 PRINT” Select from tables 950appropriate bar size
and no. then type continue to resume running and
press enter”
940 BREAK
950 REM Design of diagonal tention
970 VU = CR*W*LC/2000
980 VCA = 0.053574*B*D*FC^.5
990 IF VCA = > VU THEN 1020
1000 IF VCA<VU THEN 1060
1020 PRINT” This is a double reinforced concrete beam
with a section adequate for diagonal tention just
provide stirrups as directed by Field Engineer”
1030 PRINT” Programmed by Bienvenido C. David a
Civil/Structural Engineer on April 30, 1983
1040 STOP
1070 VCD = VU – VCA
1080 J = 1000*VU/W
1090 JA = 0.5*CR*VCA*LC/VU
1100 Z = J – JA
1110 PRINT” Point of zero excess shear is at a distance
=”;Z;”Feet from support stirrups needed in this
region”
1120 REM Let us consider a 1 Ft interval distance
1130 ZA = 0.187*FY*D/VCD
1140 FOR X = 1 TO Z
1150 Z1 = ZA*Z/(Z – X)
1160 NEXT X
1170 END
102
INTRODUCTION: When a beam and slab are poured at once, resulting in monolithic
construction, a portion of the slab on each side of the beam maybe considered as the flange
of a Tee – Beam. The portion of the beam below the flange serves as the web, sometimes
called the stem.
Flange bending stresses is not uniform from bean to beam, being largest over the web and
tending to drop off with distances from the web. Tee beams are analyzed in much the same
way as rectangular beams. There are two analysis employed.
a) First analysis: The neutral axis lies within the flange, if this happens then the formulas
for rectangular beams is valid program no 7 & program no 8.
b) Second case: The neutral axis lies below the flange, when this happens, this becomes a
Tee –Beam and the analysis is different from the rectangular analysis.
To be sure whether it is a rectangular or Tee – Beam, it is best to locate the neutral axis of the
section. When the location of the N.A. is less than the flange thickness, then this is a
rectangular beam therefore formulas for rectangular beam is applicable (program no 7 & 8).
On the other hand if the N.A. is greater than the flange thickness different analysis is required.
In deriving formulas for Tee –Beam, it is best to consider the figure below and the following
symbols will be used.
ANALYSIS AND FORMULA DERIVATIONS FOR COMPUTER APPLICATION
a = Depth of stress rectangular block p =As/bd = Steel reinforcement ratio from code
hf = Flange thickness b = Width of beam if rectangular bw Width of beam web portion

103
d = Effective depth of beam = h – 2.5 or the distance of centroid tention steel to outer fiber of
concrete.
Asf = Area of steel required in the flange section Fy = Ultimate yield strength of steel in K.S.I
Fc = Cylinder strength of concrete in K.S.I

b hf
d cb SLAB SLAB SLAB
N.A.
● Ast●
bw
FIGURE 1 hf FIGURE 2 .85Fc’
b eu
d c
N.A. (d – c) d – a/2
● Ast● es AsFy
bw
SECTION STRAIN DIAGRAM PRESSURE DIAGRAM
In the figure below is a cross section of tee Beam with the neutral axis located below the flange as
before a = = then from the figure, it is evident that
Asf = Equation (1) here the symbol Bw is the beam web. If we let
the symbol Mn-1 = The nominal moment carried by the flange neglecting the web portion then
the equivalent resisting nominal moment will be Mn -1 = (Asf)(fy)(d – hf/2) we call it equation (2)
If As is the total area of the tensile steel, then the remaining steel area (As – Asf) at stress fy is
balanced by the rectangular portion of the beam (section bw by d) with the rectangular portion
as free body shown below and applying
104
.85fc’
Cc =0.85Fc’abw
d As (d – a/2)
● ● Ts = (As – Asf)fy
bw
0.85fc’abw = (As – Asf)fy or solving for a = (Fy) thus an additional moment

say
M(n-2) = (as – Asf)fy (d – a/2) the total moment then by the method of superposition say
Mn will be the sum of moments Mn -1 plus Mn – 2 = Mn -1 + Mn- 2
Mn = Asf(fy)(d – hf/2) + (As Asf)(fy)(d – a/2) introducing a factor of , the design moment then
would be Md = reinforcements see design steps program name Trap
Foot.
The criteria for overhanging width are given below A.C.I. code recommendations.
1. For symmetrical T Beams the effective width b shall not exceed one fourth the span
length of the beam.. The overhanging slab width on the either side of the beam web
shall not exceed eight times the thickness of the slab or one half the clear distance to
the next beam.
2. For beams having a slab on one side only, the effective overhanging slab width shall not
exceed one – twelfth the span length of the beam, nor six times the slab thickness , nor
one half the clear distance to the next beam.
3 For isolated beams in which the flange is used only for the purpose of providing additional
compressive area, the flange thickness shall not be less than one – half the width of the
web, and the total flange width shall not be more than four times the web width.
105
In our general computer program , computer analyze given section , determine whether
given section analyzed as a rectangular or tee beam if so it prints on the T.V monitor
screen” This is a rectangular or Tee Beam”. A break command statement causes the
computer to stop running temporarily, the designer can then sketch the actual section .
After the command continue , computer performs the remaining program lines and
prints on the monitor T.V screen areas of steel in midspan and supports respectively all
in conformity with 1077 A.C.I. code.
*** Note: if the depth of stress rectangular block is equals to or less than the flange thickness
then a rectangular beam analysis is considered. If a is greater than the flange thickness
then a Tee beam analysis is required.
Pwb = Pb + Pf where Pb is the balanced steel ratio of rectangular portion of the beam and Pf
is the unbalance steel reinforcement ratio of the flange. The recommends that that the
steel ratio used shall not exceed Pmax = 0.75(Pb + Pf) here
Pb = 0.85(B1)(Fc/Fy) here Pf = Asf/Bw where Asf = Area of steel at flange
Bw = Area of web Spacing of bars shall not exceed 5 times the thickness of the
flange nor in any case exceed 18”
Again the depth of stress rectangular block is *** Note given d, b and Mu depth
of stress rectangular block is
–
a=d ± d2 For Computer application where b = web
thickness if rectangular analysis prevails = to Bw if Tee beam prevails
b = effective flange width.
LEGENDS DESCRIPTION
FC Cylinder strength of concrete at ultimate (K.S.I)
Fy Yield Strength of steel at ultimate (K.S.I)
106
Hf Flange thickness in inches

Cb Coefficient of positive moment at midspan no unit
Ca Coefficient of negative moment at exterior A
Cc Coefficients of negative moment at interior support C
N Percentage of steel ratio
CR Coefficient of shear reaction at support
LC Length of beam in feet
LD Centerline spacing in Feet
CU Coefficient of largest maximum moment for solving section of beam.

19, 1970 PRC NO: 10170
DESCRIPTION: Design of Tee Reinforced Concrete Beam

Code)
TITLE: Design Of Reinforced Concrete Tee Beam CODE NAME: TEE
BEAM
MACHINE LANGUAGE : TI BASIC COMPUTER: AMSTRAD
Computer Program steps: 195
LIBRARY MODULE: Floppy Disk PROGRAM NAME: Tee Beam PTR
NO: 3235323 at Bagiuo City 02/11/1983
DRAWING FIGURE CODE NAME: TEE BEAM

REFERENCE TEXTBOOKS: Design of Concrete Structures By George Winter CHAPTER 9 Pages
124 to 131, The Theory and Practice of Reinforced Concrete by Clarence W. Dunham
107
b eu .85Fc’
N.A. d C B1C
●● es AsFy
bw
SECTION STRAIN DIAGRAM STRESS DIAGRAM
interpreted.
TEE – BEAM: Is a computer program that analyzes whether a given beam is a rectangular or
Tee Beam. Determines effective flange width and print on the screen value of depth of stress
rectangular block. Computes area of required steel reinforcements in conformity with the 1977
A.C.I code. Checks given cross section using the less accurate A.C.I code the required diagonal
108
tention. Plots spacing of stirrups all in accordance with the 1977 A.C.I. code. The program is
written in advance basica software language and runs on programmable calculators, main
frame computer and E review centre. Design to be used in a time sharing systems in a
conversational mode.

If true branch out

Main program
If false
COMPUTER INSTRUCTION CODES
LINE STATEMENT NUMERICAL OUTPUT

NO (SAMPLE ONLY) ***For
debugging only
10 CALL CLEAR
15 PRINT” This is design of Tee Beam one flange only
by U.S.D in English units“
20 PRINT” All material specifications in Kips per
square inch , Linear dimensions in feet, slab
thickness in inches”
25 PRINT” This program was developed by Bienvenido
C. David A Civil?Structural engineer on March 1983
in Baguio City”
30 PRINT” If all data’s are in their consistent units then
run line no 50”
45 STOP
50 REM First determine if beam is rectangular or Tee
beam
55 INPUT” Cylinder strength of concrete at 3
ultimate”:FC
60 INPUT” Yield Strength of steel at ultimate”:FY” 60
65 INPUT” Thickness of flange in inches”:HF 3
109
70 INPUT” Clear distance of beam in feet”:LC 24

75 INPUT’ Centerline spacing in feet”:LD 3.91
80 INPUT” Live load in pounds per foot”:LL 1132
85 INPUT”Coeffecient of negative moment at exterior 0.0625
support”:CA
90 INPUT”Coeffecient of positive moment at center 0.0714285
span”:CB
95 INPUT’Coeffecient of negative moment at interior 0.111111
support”:CC
100 INPUT”Coeffecient of largest moment for 0.111111
determining section of beam”:CU
110 INPUT” Percentage of steel ratio N designers 0.60
choice”:N
120 REM Find or analyze given section
140 IF FC>= THEN 150 ELSE 170
150 BA = 0.85
160 GOTO 180
170 BA = 0.85 – (FC-4)/1*0.05
180 PB = 0.541857*FC/FY*87*BA/(87+FY) 0.013629
190 PC = N*PB 0.008177
200 PM = 0.2/FY 0.003333
210 IF PC<PM THEN 230
**** Note insert as input statement
135 INPUT”Dimention of beam in inches”:BW 11
220 IF PC < PM THEN 250
230 P = PM
240 GOTO 260
250 P = PC 0.008177
260 X = 1- 0.59*P*FY/FC 0.9035144
270 Y = 0.90*P*FY*BW 4.8571
280 G = X*Y 4.3884597
290 E = 83.33*G/(CU*LC^2) 5.71448
300 F = -1.456*BW -16.016
310 C = -(3.63*BW + 1.7*LL) -1964.33
320 Q = (F^2 – 4*E*C)^.5 212.505
***** T he quantity (F^2 – 4*E*C) must be greater than 0
330 D= (- F + Q)/(2*E) 19.99 say 20
340 H = D + 2.5 22.5
350 REM With section known determine if rectangular
section or tee beam
400 DL = 6.25*LD*HF + 1.0466*BW*H 332.346 LBS/FT.
410 W = 1.4*DL + 1.7*LL 2389 POUNDS PER FOOT
110
420 MU = 3 /250*CU*LC^2*W 1833 KIPS

430 B1 = 1/12*LC*12 + BW 35”
440 B2 = 6*HF + BW 29”
450 B3 = 1/2*LD*12 23.46 SAY 24
460 IF B1<B2 THEN 490
470 IF B2<B3 THEN 520
480 GOTO 540
490 IF B1<B3 THEN 500
500 B = B1
510 GOTO 550
520 B = B2
530 GOTO 550
540 B = B3
550 R = 2.61*MU/(FC*B) B =23.46, R = 67.97
560 A = D – (D^2 – R)^.5 1.778
*** Note the quantity (D^2 – R) must be greater 0
570 IF A<=HF THEN 590 HF = 3
580 IF A>HF THEN 1070
590 PRINT” Since A is less than or equal to HF then
rectangular beam analysis is valid neutral axis
within flange program no 7 & no 8”
595 PRINT” Detail section of beam then type continue
to resume running and press enter”
600 BREAK
605 MA = 3/250*CA*W*LC^2 1032.048 Inch kips
610 IF (D^2 – 2.61*MA/(FC*BW))<0 THEN 615 ELSE 630
615 PRINT” Depth of stress rectangular block is
625 STOP
630 AA = D – SQR(D^2 – 2.61*MA/(FC*BW)) 2.15696
635 AE = MA/(0.90*FY*(D – AA/2)) 1.01000 Square Inch
support=”;AE”Square Inch”
645 MB = 3/250*CB*W*LC^2 1179.48
650 IF (D^2 – 2.61*MB/(FC*BW))<0 THEN 655 ELSE 670
655 PRINT “Depth of stress rectangular block not
possible review given data”
665 STOP
670 AB = D – (D^2 – 2.61*MB/(FC*BW))^.5 2.4868
680 ASP = MB/(0.90*FY*(D – AB/2)) 1.1645086
690 PRINT”Recquired area of steel at midspan=”;ASP” 1.1645086
Square Inches”
111
695 MC = 3/250*CC*W*LC^2 1834 Kips

700 IF (D62 – 2.61*MC/(FC*BW))<0 THEN 705 ELSE 720
710 STOP
720 AC = D – (D^2 – 2.61*MC/(FC*BW))^.5 4.032940
725 ASI = MC/(.90*FY**(D – AC/2)) 1.8888 Sq Inch
730 PRINT” Select from table appropriate bar size No
then type continue to resume running detail and
sketch section and reinforcements”
735 BREAK
740 Vu = 1.15*w*lc/2000 32.968 Kips
745 VCA = 0.053754*FC^.5*BW*D 20.483 Kips
750 PRINT” IF VCA >= VU THEN 770 ELSE 850
770 PRINT” Section adequate for diagonal tention
provide stirrups for unforeseen loads or as directed
by Field Engineer”
775 PRINT” Shear reaction at support =”;VU;”Kips
780 PRINT” Negative moment at exterior support
=”;MA”Inch Kips”
785 PRINT” Positive moment at midspan =”;MB”Inch
Kips”
790 PRINT” Negative moment at interior support
=”;MC;”Inch Kips”
800 PRINT” Copy end moments for column design type
continue then press enter to resume running”
810 BREAK
Civil/Structural engineer on July 1983 in Baguio
City”
830 STOP
850 REM Stirrups needed in this region VU is greater
than VCA
860 VCD = VU – VCA 12.485 Kips
870 J = 1000*VU/W 13.799 Feet
880 JA = 0.5*VCA*LC/VU 7.455
890 REM Determine spacing of stirrups at every 1
Ft.interval
900 Z = J – JA 6.344
905 PRINT” Point of zero excess shear is at a distance
=”;Z;”Feet from support stirrups needed in this
region”
910 ZA = 0.187*FY*D/VCD 17.9735
112
915 FOR SX = 1 TO Z
920 Z1 = ZA*Z/(Z – SX)
930 PRINT” Spacing required at every 1 Ft
interval=”;Z1;”Inches”
935 NEXT SX
**** Note for answers example only spacing of stirrups 21.33,26.48,34.098,48.6446
are & 84.838 in inches
940 PRINT” Height of beam in inches=”;H
support=”;AE;”Square Inches”
950 PRINT”Recquired area of steel at
midspan=”;ASP;”Square Inches”
960 PRINT”Recquired area of steel at interior
support=”;ASI”Square Inches”
970 PRINT” Total maximum shear reaction at support is `
VU=”;VU;”Kips”
975 PRINT” Copy negative moment equals to first at 1032.048
exterior support=”MA;”Inch Kips”
980 PRINT” Copy positive moment at midspan equals to 1179.48
=”MB;”Inch Kips”
985 PRINT “Copy end moment at face of interior 1834
support equals to =”MC;”Inch Kips”
990 PRINT” Sketch and detail rectangular beam then
type continue press enter to resume running”
995 BREAK
Civil/Engineer on the year 1983 in Baguio City”
1010 STOP
1070 REM Neutral axis within web a tee beam analysis
1075 ASF = 0.85*FC*(B – BW)*HF/FY 1.588 Inch
1080 M1 = 0.90*ASF*FY*(D – HF/2) 3306 Inch Kips
1090 MA = 3/250*CA*W*LC^2 4012.416
1100 M2 = MA – M1 706.416
1110 IF (D^2 – 2.61*M2/(FC*BW))<0 THEN 1120 ELSE
1140
1120 PRINT “Depth of stress rectangular block is
1130 STOP
1140 A2 = D – SQR(D^2 – 2.61*M2/(FC*BW)) 0.7035 Inch
1145 AS2 = M2/(0.90*FY*(D – A2/2)) 0.32944 Square Inches
1150 AT1 = AS2 + ASF 1.9174
1155 PRINT”Recquired area of steel at exterior
support=”AT1;”Square Inches”
113
1160 P1 = AT1/(BW*D) 0.00435

1165 PF = ASF/(BW*D) 0.0036036
1170 PU = 2.7225*FC/FY*87/(87 + FY) 0.02138
1175 PW = 0.75*(PF + PU) 0.0187377
1180 PRINT” Compare P1 and PW maximum allowable
stress from code”
1185 MB = 3/250*CB*LC^2 4585.61
1190 M3 = MB – M1 1279
1215
1210 STOP
1215 A3 = D – (D^2 – 2.61*M3/(FC*BW))^.5 1.283
1215 AS3 = M3/(0.90*FY*(D – A3/2)) 0.60086 Square Inch
1225 AT2 = ASF + AS3 2.18966
1230 PRINT”Recquired area of steel at 2.1896
midspan=”;AT2;”Square inches”
1240 P2 = AT2/(BW*D) 0.004969
1250 REM Compare P2 and PW
1255 M4 = MC – M1 3820 Inch Kips
1275
1265 PRINT “Depth of stress rectangular block is
1270 STOP
1275 A4 = D – (D^2 – 2.61*M4/(FC*BW))^.5 3.96
1280 AS4 = M4/(0.90*FY*(D – A4/2)) 1.85768
***** Note insert 1253 program line value of MC
1253 MC = 3/250*CC*W*LC^2 7126
1290 AT4 = AS4 + ASF 3.44568
1295 PRINT “Area of steel at interior
support=”;AT4;”Square inches”
1300 P3 = AT4/(BW*D) 0.00781936
1310 REM Compare P3 and PW allowable steel
reinforcement ratio from code
1325 VU = CR*W*LC/2000 111
1330 VCA = 0.053754*FC^.5*BW*D 41
1335 IF VCA>=VU THEN 1350
1340 IF VCA<VU THEN 1460
1350 PRINT” Section is a Tee beam section is adequate
for shear and diagonal tention provide stirrups as
114
directed by Field Engineer”

1355 PRINT” Negative moment at exterior support for
column design is=”MC;”Inch Kips”
1360 PRINT” Copy moment at interior support for
column design =”;MA;”Inch kips”
1370 PRINT” Copy shear reaction at end for column
design=”;VU;”Kips”
1380 PRINT” Detail and sketch steel reinforcements and
section then type CONTINUE to resume running
and press ENTER”`
Civil/Structural engineer on the year 1983 in Baguio
City”
1400 STOP
1470 VCD = VU – VCA 70
1480 J = 1000*VU/W 11.95
1490 JA = 0.5*CR*VCA*LC/VU 4.432
1500 Z = J – JA 7.7518
1505 PRINT” Point of zero excess shear is located at a
distance =”;Z;”Feet from support stirrups needed in
this region”
1510 REM Determine spacing at 1 Feet interval
1515 ZA = 0.187*FY*D/VCD 6.42
1520 Z1 = ZA*Z/(Z – 1) 7.404
1530 Z2 = ZA*Z/(Z – 2) 8.746
1540 Z3 = ZA*Z/(Z – 3) 10.68
1550 Z4 = ZA*Z/(Z – 4) 13.71
1560 Z5 = ZA*Z/(Z – 5) 19.16
1570 PRINT ZA
1575 PRINT”Z1 =”;Z1;”Inches”
1580 PRINT Z2=”;Z2;”Inches”
1590 PRINT”Z3=”Z3;”Inches”
1595 PRINT” Z4=”Z4;”Inches”
1600 PRINT”Z5=”;Z5;”Inches”
1610 PRINT”MC=”;MC;”MA=”;MA;”VU=”;VU
1620 PRINT “Programmed by Bienvenido C. David a
Civil/Structural engineer on the year 1983 in Baguio
City”
1630 END
115
INTRODUCTION: Design of Slab is similar to that of a rectangular beam.
In general there are four kinds of slabs in a typical building.
1 One way solid slab and beam.
2. Two way solid slab and beam.
3 Floor joist, sometimes called ribbed floor.
4. Flat slab or girdles floors.

In this chapter we will be dealing with one way slab and two way slab the two most common slabs built
by the practicing Civil engineers from day to day practice.. The ultimate method of structural theory will
be used thru out in the computer solutions. One way slab is used in foot bridges, small bridges
supported by stringers. The reinforcements in one direction runs in one direction only, from beam to
beam. The slab is uniform in thickness and there is no filler material. The number of beams in a panel
depends on the column spacing, as the name implies the bending moments are assumed to be resisted
by the beam action between two or more lines of supports, so that all of the main bars will be running
parallel to each other and perpendicular to those supports (For figure computer program name “Slab
one”)
In one way slab design, the minimum thickness is governed by the A.C.I. CODE COEFFECIENTS AS WELL
AS TEMPERATURE BARS. A unit strip 1 Ft. (12”) wide is cut perpendicular or at right angles to the
supporting bars, The A.C.I. code coefficients is normally employed for determining the moments at
supports and midspan. To determine the required area of steel per foot of width the area of one bar
times the average number of bars in a foot strip (12 divided by the spacing in inches). As an aid for
design engineers a table for various sizes of bars are included in English as well as in metric units).
In our computer program, two methods are employed the standard method, the sub –routine
method. A third method which is advantageous for many slabs is a combination of one
dimensional array in three elements with the RESTORE COMMAND of advance
BASICA. The standard formula for finding the depth of stress rectangular block as previously derived
(See chapter 4) as shown below is
116
–
and the required area of steel As = for area of steel. These two mathematical
expressions were used by the author a s a sub routine to solved areas of steel reinforcements at the
end supports and midspan. (See program listing).
One way slab is essentially a rectangular beam of comparatively large ratio of width to slab,. The
design of one way slab is similar to the design of a rectangular beam. Referring from the figure program
no 10. a strip of 12” wide is cut at right angles to the supporting beam, the bending moment being
computed for a 12: wide strip.
As per A.C.I. code minimum thickness of slab is
a) For simply supported ------------------------- L/20

b) For one end continuous ---------------------- L/24
c) Both end continuous -------------------------- l/28
d) Cantilever -----------------------------------------L/10
TEMPERATURE AND SHRINKAGE PROVISIONS

1 ) where grade 40 or 50 deformed bars were used p = 0.002
2 ) Where grade 60 deformed bars or welded wire fabric p = 0.0018
3) Slabs where reinforcements with yield strength exceeding 60,000 p.s.i. yield strength measured at
yield strain of o.35% used p= In no case shall the steel reinforcement ratio be
less than 0.0014
4) Weight of concrete is taken as 150 Lbs/Cu.Foot

117
5) Covering of steel is 1” top cover.
6) Dead and Live load factor is 1.4 and 1,7
7) Moment factor is 0.90
8) Shear reaction is 1.115
9) For computer application :
–
and the required area of steel As = for area of steel
*** Where A.C.I. code is coefficients are applicable
Exterior support ------------------ L/24
Midspan -----------------------------L/14
Interior support -------------------L/9

19, 1970 PRC NO: 10170
DESCRIPTION: Design of One Way Slab

118

Code)
TITLE: One Way Slab Design CODE NAME: One Slab
LIBRARY MODULE: Floppy Disk PROGRAM NAME: One Slab PTR
NO: 3236355 at Baguio City 01/10/1983
CODE NAME: One Slab
a b
One way slab● 1 Foot strip
TRANSVERSE SECTION
PLAN
● ● ● ● ● ●
TYPICAL SECTION
REFERENCE TEXTBOOKS: Concrete Fundamentals by The Theory and Practice of

Design of Concrete Phil M. Ferguson Reinforced Concrete by
Structures by George Winter Clarence w. Dunham.
CHAPTER 5 Pages 202 - 210
interpreted.
119
ONE SLAB: Is a computer program that designs depth and required area of steel
reinforcements at midspan, interior support and exterior support. Computer first solves
required depth of slab using the maximum steel reinforcement ratio from code. It then solves
required area of steel reinforcements at midspan and interior supports in accordance with the
A.C.I. code provisions. Computer also solves temperature bars and verify if section is safe for
diagonal tension . The computer runs in Advance BASICA language and programmable
calculators. It can easily be integrated into the E _Review center of UC BCF .

If true branch out

Main program
If false

LINE NO STATEMENT NUMERICAL OUTPUT
***(SAMPLE ONLY FOR
DEBUGGING PURPOSES)
10 CALL CLEAR
20 PRINT” This is one way slab design by U.S.D. method
in English units”
25 PRINT” Material strength in Kips Per Square Inch, Live
and Dead loads in Pounds per square Foot, Thickness
of slab in Inches and span length if feet”
120
run line no. 60”

50 STOP
60 INPUT”LL’CA,CB,CC,FC,FY”:LL.CA,CB,CC,FY CA = 0.111, CB = 0.0714, CC
=0.04166, LL = 100 P.S.F,FC
= 4K.S.I , FY = 60 K.S.I.
65 INPUT”SPAN LENGTH LC”:LC LC = 15 Feet
70 H =3/7*LC 6.42
80 DL = 12.5*H 80.25
90 W = 1.4*DL + 1.7*LL 282.224
100 PC = 0.541875*FC/FY*87/(87 + FY) 0.021
110 X = 1 – 0.59*PC*FY/FC 0.81415
120 Y = 10.8*PC*FY*X 11.08
130 MA = CA*3/250*W*LC^2 84.72
140 MB = CB*3/250*W*LC^2 54.36
150 MC = CC*3/250*W*LC^2 31.80
160 IF MA>MB THEN 190
170 IF MB>MC THEN 220
180 GOTO 240
190 IF MA>MC THEN 200
200 MU = MA
210 GOTO 250
220 MU = MB
230 GOTO 250
240 MU = MC 84.72
250 DA = (MU/Y)^.5 2.765
260 DC = H-1 5.42
270 IF DA<=DC THEN 280 ELSE 300
280 D = DC
290 GOTO 310
300 D = DA 5.42
310 H1 = D+1 6.42
320 PRINT” Overall depth of slab =”;H1;”inches”
330 Print” Detail and sketch section then type continue
to resume running”
340 BREAK
350 M= MU 84.72
360 GOSUB 610
370 AS1 = AS
380 PRINT” Area of steel at interior support=”ASI;”Square
Inches”
390 M=MB
400 GOSUB 610
121
410 ASP =AS

420 PRINT “Area of steel at midspan=”;ASP;”Square
Inches”
430 M=MC
440 GOSUB 610
450 ASE=AS
support=”ASE;”Square Inches”
470 PRINT” Select from tables appropriate size and no. of
bars”
475 PRINT” Detail and sketch steel reinforcements”
480 ASB = 0.0216*H
485 PRINT” Area of temperature bars=”ASB;”Square
Inches”
490 STOP
495 PRINT” After detailing bars type continue to resume
running”
500 BREAK
505 REM Check shear and diagonal tension
510 VU = 1/12000*(6.9*W*LC-W*D)
520 VN=758.88*FC^.5*D
530 IF VN>=VU THEN 540 ELSE 580
540 PRINT” Section adequate for shear and diagonal
tension just provide stirrups as directed by the Field
Engineer”
550 PRINT” Programmed by Bienvenido C. David, a
Civil/Structural Engineer on Jan 10, 1983 at Baguio
City”
570 STOP
580 PRINT” Section not adequate for shear and diagonal
tension provide stirrups entire region spacing as
directed by Field Engineer or Design Engineer”
590 PRINT” Programmed by Bienvenido C. David, a
Civil/Structural Engineer on Jan 10, 1983 at Baguio
City”
600 STOP
610 REM This is a sub Routine
620 IF (D^2-0.2175*M/FC)>0 THEN 630 ELSE 660 24.7698
640 STOP
650 RETURN
660 A = (D-(D^2-0.2175*M/FC)^.5) 0.4431
122
670 S = 0.90*FY*(D-A/2)
680 AS=M/S
690 RETURN
700 END
ANSWERS FOR THIS PROBLEM
a = .4431 a = .2798 a = .1619 M = 84.72 M = 54.36 M = 31.8
AS =0.3022 AS = 0.190 AS = 0.11029
S = 280.316 S = 285 S = 288.3087
INTRODUCTION
TWO WAY SLABS: Two way slabs are used when a floor panel is square or nearly
so, having beams or walls on four sides. The tensile reinforcements are used in four sides both
in the long direction and short direction. These bars in two directions transfer the loads to the
four supporting beams or walls (for figure see program no 10 code name “Slab two”). They are
usually used in large continues monolithic floor systems. They maybe solid slabs, two way ribs,
or joist with some sort of block filler between them and with a thin concrete slab poured
monolithically on top of them or “waffle construction “ having two way ribbed with a
monolithic top slab and air spaces between the ribs.
The analysis is a combination of empirical and analytical methods. Consider the figure
below, from the geometry of the figure, it can be seen that at the point of intersection of the
short beam and long beam the two have the same deflection. Thus for a uniform load W/Lb Ft.
123
4
the deflection in the short direction is Dshort = 5wal /384EI. Similarly the deflection in the long
4
direction is DLong = 5wbl /384EI equating we get the relationship Wa/Wb = Lb4/La4, From these
equations one sees that the larger share of the load w is carried in the short direction, the ratio
of the two portions of the total load being inversely proportional to the fourth power of the
ratio of the spans.
The precise determinations of moments in two way slabs with various conditions of
continuity at the supported edges are mathematically formidable and not suited for design
practice.. For this reason various simplified methods have been adopted for determining
moments, shears and reactions of such slabs.
column strip
middle strip
short direction long direction
In the moment coefficient methods , the moment in the short direction is designated by
Ma = Caw(la)2 and the moment in the long direction is Mb= Cbw(lb)2 Here the symbol Ca
and Cb are coefficients for positive , negative and shear reaction dead and live
load respectively both in the short and long direction . For the column strip. it is
assumed that the moment is equals to one third of the moment in the middle
strip. This applies to both long and short direction. The point of inflection based
from the A.C.I. code coefficients is located at a distance of one sixth of the span
length in short and long direction. Referring to chapter three of the book
In our general computer program , the author uses the mathematical expression
10. 10 Cb = (d) 11 Pb = 0.85B1( )(87000/(87000 + Fy)
12 Wb = ,85B1 (87000/(87000 + Fy) P (1 ± 1 – 2.622Mu/(bd2Fc’) )

124
Here the mathematical expression under the radical sign must not be less than zero.
A.C.I. CODE PROVISIONS FOR MIMINUM THICKNESS OF SLAB
a) For simply supported ----------------------------------L/20
b) One end continues -------------------------------------L/24
c) Both end continues ------------------------------------L/28
D) Cantilever ------------------------------------------------L/10
TEMPERATURE & SHRINKAGE PROVISIONS
1) Where grade 40 or 50 deformed bars were used use p = .0002

2) Where grade 60 deformed bars or welded wire fabric p = 0.0018
3) 3) Slabs where reinforcements with yield strength measured at yield strain o0f 0.35%
is used p = In no case shall the steel reinforcement ratio be less than
0.0014
4) Covering of steel is 1” top cover
5) Dead and live load factors 1.4 and 1.7
6) Moment factor is o.90
7) Shear reaction factor is 1.116
8) For computer application author use formula for a refer chapter three page 76 of my book
–
where A.C.I code coefficients is applicable

Exterior support -------------------------------1/24
Midspan ------------------------------------------1/14
Interior support ----------------------------------1/9
In the above formula Fc’ = cylinder strength of concrete in kips per square inch.
d = depth of slab and B = Width of slab per foot strip = 12 inches

125

19, 1970 PRC NO: 10170
DESCRIPTION: Two Way Slab Design

Code)
TITLE: Two Way Slab Design CODE NAME: Slab Two
MACHINE LANGUAGE : BASICA COMPUTER: AMSTRAD 640
Program steps: 61
LIBRARY MODULE: Floppy Disk PROGRAM NAME: Slab Two PTR
NO: 3236281 at Baguio City 05/09/1982
lb la/4
lb/4 lb/2 lb/4
la
Column strip middle strip column strip la/2
La/4
PLAN LONG DIRECTION
Mb/3
SHORT DIRECTION
Ma/3 Variations of design moments across width of critical sections for simply
supported two way slabs
REFERENCE TEXTBOOK: Concrete Fundamentals Phi Ferguson

126
REFERENCE TEXTBOOK Design Of Concrete Pages 214 to 224

Structures by George Winter
interpreted.
SLAB TWO: Is a computer program that designs and determines area of required steel per foot
of width for a two way slab using the A.C.I. code coefficients in English units, Computes shear
reaction of slab and determines bending of bars both long and in short direction. It checks steel
reinforcement ratio from code limitations . The program is written in advance basica and
designed to be used in a time sharing system in a conversational mode. Can be run to a variety
of –programmable calculators, main frame computers can be easily integrated into the E
Review centre of the UC _BCF –CE.

If true branch out

Main program
If false

127
LINE STATEMENT NUMERICAL OUTPUT

***(SAMPLE ONLY
NO FOR DEBUGGING
PURPOSES)
10 CALL CLEAR
20 PRINT” THIS IS DESIGN OF TWO WAY SLAB BY U.S.D.
METHOD IN ENGLISH UNITS”
30 INPUT” Live loads in pounds per square foot”:LL 137
40 INPUT” Cylinder strength of concrete in Kips Per Square 3
Inch”:FC
50 INPUT” Ultimate strength of steel at ultimate in Kips per 60
square inch”:FY
60 INPUT”Dimention of larger side of slab in feet B”:B 25
75 PRINT” Select from tables coefficients of moments then type
continue and press enter to resume running”
80 BREAK
85 INPUT” Coefficient of negative moment in short .071
direction”:CA
90 INPUT” Coefficient of negative moment in long direction”:CB .029
100 INPUT” Coefficient of positive dead load moment in short .039
direction”:CD
110 INPUT” Coefficient of positive live load moment in short .048
direction”:CB
120 INPUT”Coeffecient of positive live load moment in long .020
direction”:CG
125 INPUT”Coeffecient of positive dead load moment in long .016
direction”:CF
130 INPUT”Coeffecients of shear reaction in long direction”:CH .71
140 INPUT”Coeffecients of shear reaction in short direction”:CI .29
150 D=H-1 4.99 SAY 5
145 H=0.13333*(A+B) 5.99 SAY 6
170 DL=12.5*1.4*H 104.825
175 W=1.7*LL+DL 337.72
178 MNA= 3/250*CB*W*A^2 115
180 MNB = 3/250*CB*W*B^2 73.45
190 MDA = 3/250*CD*DL*A^2 19.623
200 MLA = 3/250*1.7*CE*LL*A^2 53.66
210 MTD = MDA+MLA 73.283
220 MDB = 3/250*CF*DL*B^2 12.5136
230 MLB = 3/250*CG*LL*1.7*B^2 34.935
240 MTB = MDB+MLB 47.448
128
250 Z = 0.847*FC/FY 0.04235

260 Q= 1 – (1-2.622*MTA/(12*D^2*FC))^.5 0.113633
270 PAT =Z*Q 0.0048
280 APS=12*PAT8D .288 Square Inch
per ft.
285 PRINT “Area of steel bottom reinforcement in short
direction =”APS;”Square Inches per foot of width”
290 R = 1-(1-.2185*MNA/(D^2*FC))^.5 .18455
300 PNA = Z*R 0.0078
310 ANS=PNA*12*D 0.468 Square Inch
per Ft.
315 PRINT” Area of negative moment steel top bars in short
direction =”;ANS;”Square Inches per foot of width”
320 S =1-(1-2.185*MTB/((D-2.50^2*FC))^.5 .0893
330 PTB = Z*S 0.003782
340 ANB = 12*PTB*(D-.5) .204 Square Inch
per foot of width
345 PRINT “Area of steel bottom reinforcement in long
direction=”;ANB;”Square Inch per foot of width”
350 U=1-(1-.2185*MNB/(D^2*FC))^.5 .113425
360 PNB=Z*U 0.0048
370 BNS=12*PNB*D 0.2882 Square
Inches per foot of
width”
385 PRINT” Area of steel top reinforcement in long direction
=”;BNS;”Square Inches” per foot of width”
390 WB=CH8A8W/2 2397
395 WA=CI*W*B/2 1224
400 VC =645*D8FC^.5 5585
410 X =1/6*A 3.33
415 PRINT” Inflection point in short direction is located at a
distance =”X;”feet”
420 Y=1/6*B 4.16666
425 PRINT” Inflection point in long direction is located at a
distance =”;Y”Feet”
430 PRINT “Select from tables appropriate no. and size of bars
detail and sketch slab then type continue to resume
running”
440 BREAK
445 PRINT” Load acting on the long direction beam per foot
=”;WB”Pounds per foot”
450 PRINT” Load acting on short beam per foot =”;WA;” Pounds
per foot”
129
460 PRINT” Bend up every third bar from the bottom to provide
negative steel at discontinuous edge”
470 PRINT” Safe shear capacity of section in pounds=”;VC
480 PRINT” Programmed by Bienvenido C. David on September
1982
490 END
130
WEB REINFORCEMENTS
INTRODUCTION: Web reinforcements or diagonal tension commonly known as stirrups are
needed if the allowable shear carried by the concrete is less than the actual shear due to
superimposed loads. i.e. Vu = Vn where Vu the total shear force applied to the section due to
factor loads, Vn Normal shear strength equals to the sum of the contribution of concrete and web steel
. The strength reduction factor 0.85. In our previous programs refer
chapter 4 programs no. 7, 8 and 9 I have included spacing of stirrups using the less accurate
code. Program no 12 incorporates design of web reinforcements using the more accurate
A.C.I. code.
The formula using the more accurate A.C.I. code is VC = 1.9Fc’ + 2500Pw ( )
But Vc = 3.5Fc’bwd bw Web width for Tee section or beam width for rectangular section. d
= Effective depth to tensile steel in inches.
pw Longitudinal tensile steel ratio or As/bd for tee or rectangular
section. Vu = Shear force at section at factored loads, LBS or Kips
Mu = Moment at section at factored loads, Inch Lbs or Inch Kips and Fc’ specified compressive
strength of concrete in K.S.I.
131
In the above equation using the more accurate code we notice that at any section X distance from
support Vc is a function of X. To find the point of zero excess shear we equate Vc = Vu a cubical
3 2
equation in the third degree results in the form A1x + B1x + C1X + D1 = 0
*** Note for computer use. author use the “General cubic equation program no1” to
solve the value of X and checked it by the :”Newton’s approximation program no2”
The quantity Vud/Mu is not to be taken greater than 1. As an alternative the A.C.I. code
allows the use of simpler, less accurate A.C.I. CODE Vc = 2Fc’bwd which is adequate for
most design purposes.
Av = Required area of vertical stirrups given by the formula Av = .50bws/Fy
where S is the longitudinal spacing of web reinforcement in inches Fy Yield point of steel at
ultimate in K.S.I.
Av = Total area of web reinforcement steel in square inch.

This provision holds unless Vu is less than one – half of the design strength Vc provided by
the concrete.
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
PLAN
STIRRUPS (ELEVATION)
Theoretical spacing
Practical spacing
Graph showing practical and theoretical spacing of web

reinforcements
132

19, 1970 PRC NO: 10170
DESCRIPTION: Design of Diagonal Tension using the more accurate A.C.I.

code in English Units
SUBJECT: Reinforced Concrete Design (USD ALTERNATIVE) 1983 ACI

Code
TITLE: Design of Diagonal Tension CODE NAME: Dia - shear
LIBRARY MODULE: Floppy Disk PROGRAM NAME: Dia Shear PTR
NO: 4236357 at Baguio City 09/11/1981
CODE NAME: Dia Shear
Ma w Lbs per foot Mb top cover of steel 2.5”
● ● ● h
shaded portion represents points of zero excess shear ● ● ●

stirrups needed in this region b
PLAN
Lc/2 Lc/2
stirrups a shown
Lc
ELEVATION
133

CHAPTER 4 Pages 131 - 137
interpreted.
DIA – SHERA: : Is a computer program that DESIGNS THE RECQUIRED STIRRUPS AND SPACING
USING THE MORE ACCURATE A.C.I code in English units using the USD format. Computer solves
point of zero excess shear using the “General mathematical program cubic” and rechecked it
using the “Newton’s method of approximation program “. Determines maximum and minimum
spacing of web reinforcements as per A.C.I code requirements. It display on the monitor screen
whether given section is adequate for diagonal tension or not. For a given five distances from
column face, It evaluates required spacing in between stirrups The computer runs in Advance
BASICA language and programmable calculators. It can easily be integrated into the E _Review
center of UC BCF .

If true branch out

Main program
If false
134

LINE STATEMENT NUMERICAL
OUTPUT
NO ***(SAMPLE
ONLY FOR
DEBUGGING
PURPOSES)
5 CALL CLEAR
10 PRINT” This is design of diagonal tension using the more
accurate A.C.I code”
15 PRINT” For drawing and legend please see program
record and description”
20 PRINT” This programmed was developed by Bienvenido
C. David a Civil Structural engineer on November 1981
at Baguio City”
25 PRINT” All units of linear dimensions in inches, clear
span of beam in feet, material specifications in Kips per
square Inch, clear span of beam in feet.”
30 PRINT” Shear diagonal factor is taken as 0.85”
35 REM Design of diagonal tension using the accurate A.C.I
code is VC =(1.98*FC^.5 + 2500*PW*VU/MU*D)*B*D
45 PRINT” If all data’s are in their consistent units then run
line no 60”
50 STOP
60 CALL CLEAR
65 REM Design of diagonal tension using the more accurate
A.C.I code
70 INPUT”DB,BW,CV,W1,LC,FC”:DB,BW,CV,W1,LC,FC
75 REM Determine if section is adequate for diagonal
tension or not
80 W = W1/1000 7.9 Kips
85 VU=CV*W*(LC/2) 79 Kips
90 VC=94.077*BW*DB*FC^.5/1000 57.35 Kips
100 IF VU<=VC THEN 120
110 IF VU>VC THEN 140
120 PRINT” Section adequate for diagonal tension provide
stirrups for unforeseen loads or as directed by the File
135
Civil Engineer spacing as per field conditions

130 STOP
140 REM Let us determine point of zero excess shear let L the
distance of zero excess shear from column face in feet.
150 PW = AS/(BW*DB) 0.0280113
160 Y1 =177.0805*PW*BW*DB^2 38,412..2
170 Y2 = 51.068*BW*DB*FC^.5 31134.321
180 A1 =500*CV*W1 3950
190 B1 = 0.58*Y2-750*CV*W1*LC -102,932.84
200 C1 = 250*CV*W1*LC^2+Y1*CV-0.5*Y2*LC 517068.99
210 D1 = 1/2*(-Y1)CV*LC -384,122.00
220 PRINT” This is a cubic equation a third degree”
225 PRINT TAB(1):A1;”L Cube”;TAB(10);B1” L
Square”;TAB(15);C1”L”;TAB(22)D1;TAB(25);”=0”
*** Note when computer reach line no 225 it prints on
the computer screen A1L3 + B1L2 + C1L + D1 = 0
In our example this is 3950L3 -102932.84L2 +517.068.99L
– 384122 = 0
230 PRINT” There are two methods of solving this third
degree equation by Newton’s method or by the General
cubic equation”
235 PRINT” Put value of struct math = 1 to solve equation by
the General cubic equation program as input statement”
240 PRINT” Put value of structmath =2 to solve the third
degree equation by Newton’s method”
250 INPUT” Value of structmath”:Structmath
260 IF STRUCTMATH=1 THEN 280
270 IF STRUCTMATH=2 THEN 590
280 REM This is the General Cubic equation A1X3 + B1X2 +
C1X + D1 = 0
290 B1=B1/A1 -26.06
295 C =C1/A1 230.95
300 D =D1/A1 -97.2475
305 P =C-B2/3
310 Q = D-B*C/3+2*B^3/27
315 R =P^3/27+Q^2/4
320 IF R<0 THEN 390
136
325 Z =-Q/2+R^.5
330 IF Z<0 THEN 360
340 ZA = Z^0.3333
350 GOTO 470
360 ZB = ABS(Z)^.33333
370 ZA = -ZB
380 GOTO 470
390 O =ATN(ABS(R)^.5/(-Q/2))/3
400 PI =2.094395102
410 ZC = ((-Q/2)^2-R)^.5
420 ZA =(ZC)^.333333
430 IF (-Q/2)>0 THEN 460
440 ZA - -ZA
450 XA = COS(O+2*PI)*(ZA-P/(3*ZA))-(B/3)
460 X = COS(O+PI)*ZA-P/(3*ZA))-(B/3)
470 XB = COS(O)*(ZA-P/(3*ZA))-(B/3)
480 IF XA>0 THEN 510
490 IF X>0 THEN 530
500 IF XB>0 THEN 550
510 L1=XA
515 PRINT “Point of zero excess shear is =”;L1”Feet from
support”
520 GOTO 950
530 L1 = X
535 PRINT” Point of zero excess shear is =”L1;”Feet from
support”
540 GOTO 950
550 L1 = XA
560 PRINT” Point of zero excess shear is L1 is=”;L1;”Feet
from support”
570 GOTO 950
580 STOP
590 REM This is finding the real positive root by Newton’s
method of approximation
600 REM Format is A1X3 + B1X2 + C1X + D1 = 0
610 CALL CLEAR
137
620 PRINT” This is Newton’s method of approximations

finding the real positive root of a cubic equation”
630 PRINT” Try a value of X as first trial if ready then run line
660”
650 STOP
660 INPUT” Coefficients of A,B,C,D”:A,B,C,D
670 INPUT” Value of X as first trial”:X
680 INPUT” How many trials T”:T
690 P =1
700 PRINT”I am performing trial no=”;P
710 PRINT” Assume trial root is=”X
720 REM Format is Y =AX3 + BX2 + CX + D =0
730 Y = A*X^3+B*X^2+C*X+D
740 IF Y=0 THEN 750 ELSE 770
750 PRINT” Real root is=”;X
760 GOTO 940
770 T = T-1
780 IF T=0 THEN 780 ELSE 800
790 STOP
800 R-X
810 GOSUB 880
820 X=S
830 P=P+1
840 PRINT” I am performing trial no=”;P
850 PRINT” Trial root is=”;X
860 GOTO 730
870 STOP
890 M =A*R^3+B*R^2+C*R+D
900 N=3*A*R^2+2*B*R+C
910 S = R-(M/N)
920 RETURN
930 STOP
940 L1=X
950 PRINT’ Point of zero excess shear is located at a distance
L1=”X;”Feet from support”
138
955 PRINT” Copy important data’s for next input statement

then type continue to resume running”
960 BREAK
1590 INPUT”DB,LC,W1,FC,FY,PW,BW”:DB,LC,W1,FC,FY,PW,BW
1600 VD =W/2*(LC-DB/6) 64.5 Kips
1610 MD –W/24*(LC*DB-DB^2/12) 131.554
1630 X3 =VD*DB/(12*MD) 0.8988744
1640 IF X3<1 THEN 1650 ELSE 1670
1650 X4=X3
1660 GOTO 1680
1670 X4-1
1680 VC1 =BW*DB*(51.07055*FC^.5+2125*PW*X4)/1000 49.969
1690 VC2 =0.0940777*BW*DB*FC^.5 57.355
1700 IF VC1<VC2 THEN 1710 ELSE 1730
1710 VC=VC1
1720 GOTO 1750
1730 VC =VC2
1740 VU = W/2*LC 79 Kips
1750 S1=0.85*0.22*FY*DB/(VU-VC) 5.66 Inches
1760 GOSUB 1910
1770 PRINT’ Maximum spacing of stirrups as per A.C.I
code”=;SN
1780 REM To find spacing at any distance say X1,X2,X3,X4 &
X5 we dim Xs in five elements with TS as a pointer
1785 PRINT” Copy or put numerical values of X1,X2,X3,X4 &
X5 as data statement program line no 1795 then type
continue to resume running”
1781 REM A one dimensional array in XS
1786 SO = 0.187*FY*DB/(CV*(W1*LC/2- 3.599 Inches
0.0537587*BW*DB*FC^.5))
1790 DATA Note put numerical values of X1,X2,X3,X4 & X5 as
data statement
1795 DIM XS(5)
1800 FOR TS=1 TO 5
1805 READ XS(TS)
1810 REM Let SP spacing required at any distance X
1815 SP(TS) = (SO-L)/(L-XS(TS))
139
1820 PRINT SP(TS)

1825 NEXT TS
1830 PRINT” Spacing at X1 is=”;SP(1);”Inches”
1840 PRINT “Spacing at X2 is=”;SP(2)”Inches”
1850 PRINT”Sapcing at X3 is =”;SP(3);”Inches”
1860 PPRINT” Spacing at X4 is=”;SP(4);”Inches”
1870 PPRINT” Spacing at X5 is=”;SP(5);”Inches”
1880 PRINT” programmed by Bienvenido C. David. a
Civil/Structural Engineer on November 1981 in his
hometown Baguio City, Philippines”
1890 PRINT” Designed by Bienvenido C. David”
1900 STOP
1905 REM This is a sub – routine
1910 REM Determination of maximum spacing of stirrups per
A.C.I code of 1983
1920 VU = CV*W*LC/2 79 Kips
1930 REM Using the less accurate A.C.I code
1950 V1 = 0.0537587*BW*DB*FC^.5 32.774 Kips
1960 V2 =VU-V1 46.225 Kips
1970 V3 = 0.1075174*BW*BD*FC^.5 65.549
1980 IF V2<V3 THEN 1990 ELSE 2010
1990 S3 =DB/2 11 Inches
2000 GOTO 2020
2010 S3=DB 22 Inches
2020 S4=S3 11 Inches
2030 S2 =4.4*FY/BW 11 Inches
2040 IFS1<S2 THEN 2070
2050 IF S2<S4 THEN 2100
2060 GOTO 2120
2070 IF S1<S4 THEN 2080
2080 SM=S1
2090 GOTO 2130
2100 SM=S2
2120 SM=S4
2130 SN=SM
2140 RETURN
140
2150 END
141
INTRODUCTION
DEFLECTION: Deflection of Reinforced concrete must be checked prior to final detailing of

members. There are two reasons for these a) a structure must be safe and b) serviceable.
a) A structure is safe if it is able to resist without distress and with some margin to spare,
all forces which foressebly will act on it during its lifetime.
b) Serviceability implies, among other things that deflections and other distortions under
load will be unobjectionable small. For example excessive beam and slab deflections can
lead to objectionable cracking of partitions, poor drainage and misalignment of sensitive
machineries. It becomes important, therefore to be able to predict deflections with
reasonable accuracy, so that members can be dimensioned to ensure both adequate
strength and appropriate small deflection.
We shall deal with deflections which occur immediately upon application of loading, the so
called instantaneous deflection. Instantaneous deflections can be calculated on
elastic behavior of flexural members. From the theory of Structural Mechanics, elastic
deflections can be expressed in the form Delastic = where EI is the flexural rigidity
and F (loads, span) is a function of the particular load and span arrangement. Thus for a
3
uniform load in a simple span the deflection is equals to DEF = 5wl /384. For various types of
loadings and joint conditions, refer to any textbooks on Theory of Structures.
Using the transformed section of uncracked section and Ec is the modulus of concrete we have
deliu= F/EcIut here Iut = the moment of inertia of uncracked transform section and Ec is the
modulus of concrete. Investigations and experimental results from AC.I studies gives the
effective moment of Ie = Iut + ( 1- )3 )Ict
142
Here Ict is the moment of inertia of the cracked, transformed section Ie = effective moment of
inertia Mcr = cracking moment. For design purposes Mcr = here Ig is the moment of
inertia of the gross concrete section neglecting reinforcement and fr is the modulus of rupture
for normal concrete taken as 7.5Fc’. Yt is the distance from the neutral axis to the tension
fiber stress.
For continuous beam the A.C.I. calls for the use of the average value.
LONG TIME DEFLECTIONS: These types of deflection are caused shrinkages and creep.
Additional longtime deflection can be computed by the formula Y = Deltaxx instantaneous
deflection where coefficients depends on the duration of sustained loads. Based from
experimental results the A.C.I. codes gives Delta = 2 - – 0.6 here As’ = Area of
compression steel
and As = Area of steel reinforcement tension.
MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE COMPUTED DEFLECTIONS
TYPE OF MEMBER DEFLECTION TO BE CONSIDERED DEFLECTION

LIMITATIONS
Roofs not supporting or attached Immediate deflections due to live load L 1/180
to non structural elements likely to
be damage by large deflections
Floors not supporting or attached Immediate deflections due to live load l 1/360
to non structural elements likely to
be damaged by large deflections
Roof or floor construction That part of the total deflection which 1/480
supporting or attached to non occurs after attachments of the non
structural elements likely to be structural elements’ the sum of the long
damaged by long deflections time deflections due to all sustained loads
and the immediate deflections due to any
additional live load.
MINIMUM THICKNESS OF BEAMS ON ONE WAY SLABS
UNLESS DEFLECTIONS ARE COMPUTED
Member Minimum thickness, h

143
Cantilever simply supported One end continues Both end continues
Members not supporting or attached to partitions or other constructions likely

to be damaged by large deflections
Solids one way slab L/20 L/24 L/28 L/10
Beams or ribbed one way slab L/16 L/18.5 L/21 L/8
With uniformly loaded loads and variable moments, the deflection at any point is given as
Delta = (X3 – (2l + )X2 + + L3 - - To locate the point of deflection
we differentiate above equation and set to zero and arrived at the following generalized form
AX3 + BX2 + CX + D = 0 Here A,B,C & D are coefficients of unknown X while D is a

constant.
By computer author used Newton’s method Of Approximation to solve for X in 15 trials
(Program no 2) Also the maximum positive moment is given as Mp = L/2 +
here Ma & Mb are variable end moments and W and L is uniform distributed load per ft. and
L span length in feet.
COMPUTER OUTPUT
Upon input of numerical data’s, into the keyboard, computer first determines maximum
positive
moment then prints on the monitor screen equation of the deflection curve. It computes
theoretical deflection by the transformed section method (service load design). With given
longtime multiplier factor as input data it computes actual deflection based from code and
prints on the screen whether given cross section and steel reinforcements is adequate for
deflection.
144

19, 1970 PRC NO: 10170
DESCRIPTION: Deflection of beams by the working stress theory in

English Units

Code*** Deflection calculations by service load design (WSD. theory)
TITLE: Deflection of beams and slabs CODE NAME: Deflect
LIBRARY MODULE: Floppy Disk PROGRAM NAME: Deflect
PTR NO: 4696357 at Baguio City 10/11/1982
CODE NAME: Deflect
Longitudinal Section
B Ld H
N.A Mb
bw Ma reference line
SECTION Moment Diagram Mc

145

Structures by George Winter Simplified design of Clarence w. Dunham.
CHAPTER 4 Pages 161 - 169 Reinforced Concrete by
Parker
interpreted.
DEFLECT : Is a computer program that calculates the maximum deflection of a given beam with
variable end moments. Load is uniformly distributed. The program, computer solves location of
maximum positive moment then solves and locate point of maximum theoretical deflection.
Additional longtime deflection is also solved by computer and compares whether given section
is adequate or not. It uses the service load design method and the transformed section
method. The program is written in Advance BASICA language and can be use in
programmable calculators . It can easily be integrated into the E _Review center of UC BCF.

If true branch out

Main program
If false
146
computer instruction code
LINE STATEMENT NUMERICAL OUTPUT ***(SAMPLE

ONLY FOR DEBUGGING PURPOSES)
NO
5 Call clear
10 This is calculation of beam deflection by the
U.S.D. method
30 PRINT” Are you ready first determine point of
maximum deflection using the 1977 A.C.I code
revised”
40 PRINT’ Dimension of beam in Inches, material
strength in Kips per square Inch, uniform loads
in pounds per foot.”
50 PRINT” Let CA moment coefficient at exterior
support and Cc moment coefficient at support
C. If all data’s are in their respective units
then run line no 70”
60 STOP
70 INPUT”CA,CB,LC”CA.CB,LC 0.0725,0.0725,25
80 INPUT”DL,LL”:DL,LL 1100,2200
90 REM This is Newton’s method of
Approximation solving roots for a cubic
equation good for 15 trials only
3 2
110 REM Format is AX + BX + CX + D = 0
120 REM Input the following values as given
A,B,C,D and X1 where X1 is a trial root
130 X = LC/3
140 GOSUB 1150
150 X2=Z
160 Y2=A^X2^3+B*X2^2+C*X2+D
170 IF Y2=0 THEN 180 ELSE 200
180 PRINT” Real root is=”;X2
190 STOP
200 X=X2
210 GOSUB 1150
220 X3=Z
230 Y3=A*X3^3+B*X3^2+C*X3+D
240 IF Y3=0 THEN 250 ELSE 270
250 PRINT” Real positive root is=”;X3
147
260 STOP
270 X=X3
280 GOSUB 1150
290 X4=Z
300 Y4=A*X4^3+B*X4^2+C*X4+D
310 IF Y4=0 THEN 320 ELSE 340
320 PRINT “Real positive root is=”;X4
330 STOP
340 X=X4
350 GOSUB 1150
360 X5=Z
370 IF Y5=0 THEN 390 ELSE 410
400 STOP
410 X=X5
420 GOSUB 1150
430 X6=Z
440 Y6=A*X6^3+B*X6^2+C*X6+D
450 IF Y6=0 THEN 460 ELSE 480
470 STOP
480 X=X6
490 GOSUB 1150
500 X7=Z
510 Y7= A*X7^3+B*X7^2+C*X7 +D
520 IF Y7=0 THEN 530 ELSE 550
530 PRINT” Real positive root is=”X7
540 STOP
550 X=X7
560 GOSUB 1150
570 X8=Z
580 Y8=A*X8^3+B*X8^2+C*X8+D
590 IF Y8=0 THEN 600 ELSE 620
600 PRINT” Real positive root is X8=”;X8
610 STOP
620 X=X8
630 GOSUB 1150
640 X9=Z
650 Y9=A*X9^3+B*X9^2+C*X9+D
660 IF Y9=0 THEN 670 ELSE 690
670 PRINT” Real positive root is X9=”X9
580 STOP
148
690 X=X9
700 GOSUB 1150
710 X10=Z
720 Y10= A*X10^3+B*X10^2+C*X10+D
730 IF Y10 = 0 THEN 740 ELSE 760
750 STOP
760 X-X10
770 GOSUB 1150
780 X11=Z
790 Y11= A*X11^3+B*X11^2+C*X11+D
800 IF Y11 =0 THEN 810 ELSE 830
810 PRINT” Real positive root is X11=”;X11
820 STOP
830 X=X11
840 GOSUB 1150
850 X12=Z
860 Y12=A*X12^3+B*X12^2+C*X12+D
870 IF Y12=0 THEN 880 ELSE 900
890 STOP
900 X=X12
910 GOSUB 1150
920 X13=Z
930 Y13=A*X13^3+B*X13^2+C*X13+D
940 IF Y13=0 THEN 950 ELSE 970
960 STOP
970 X=X13
980 GOSUB 1150
990 X14=Z
1000 Y14=A*X14^3+B*X14^2+C*X14+D
1010 IF Y14=0 THYEN 1020 ELSE 1040
1020 PRINT” Real positive root is =”;X14
1030 STOP
1040 X=X14
1050 Y14=A*X14^3+B*X14^2+C*X14+D
1055 GOSUB 1150
1060 X15=Z
1070 Y15= A*X15^3+B*X15^2+C*X15+D
1090 PRINT”Y15=”Y15;”At the end of 15 cycle”
149
1100 STOP
1110 REM A sub routine for Newton’s Method”
1115 REM with X=Lc/3 as first trial
1150 W=1.4*DL+1.7*LL 5280
1155 W1=W/1000 3.3. IN KIPS
1160 A=1/6*W1
1170 B= -(1/4*W1*LC+1/2*MA/LC-1/2*MB/LC) -20.625
1180 C=MA -150
1190 D=W1*LC^3/24-MA*LC/3-MB*LC/6 273.43
1157 MA=CA*W1*LC^2 150 Foot kips
1159 MB=CB*W1*LC^2 150 Foot kips
2030 REM Actual sub routine
2040 Y=A*X^3+B*X^2+C*X+D
2050 Q=3*A*X^2+2*B*X+C
2060 Z=X-(Y/Q)
2070 RETURN
2080 STOP
2100 PRINT” This is actual computation of
deflection”
2110 REM For symbols see program record and
drawing
2120 INPUT”BF,BW,FC,FY”:BF,BW,FC,FY Example BF=75,BW=14,FC=2.5 &
FY=40
2130 INPUT”H,HF,X,DLP,LLP”:H,HF,X,DLP,LLP H=24.5,HF=5,X=12.5,DLP=20,LLP=80
2140 INPUT”ASB.AST”:ASB,AST ASB=3.58,AST=5.56
2145 INPUT”ASN:ASN ASN=1.58 Sq Inch
2150 AT1=BW*(H-HF)+BF*HF 648
2160 M1=(H-HF)*BW*((H-HF)/2+HF)+BF*HF*HF/2 4964.25
2170 Y1=M1/AT1 7.65 Inches
2180 REM Compute moment of inertia for
uncracked section
2200 IHC=1/12*(BF-BW)*HF^3+(BF-BW)*HF*(Y1- 8756.24
HF/2)^2
2210 IVC=1/12*BW*H^3+BW*H(H/2-Y1)^2 24384.50
2220 IGU=IHC+IVC 33139.503
2230 REM Compute moment of inertia of cracked
section i.e positive bending
2240 EC=1802.498*FC^.5 2849.995
2250 ES=29000
2260 N=INT(ES/EC) 10
2270 IHU= 1/12*BF*HF^3+BF*HF*(Y2-HF/2)^2 1864.
INSERT THE FOLLOWING PROGRAM LINES
150
2262 AT2=BF*HF+N*ASB 410.8

2265 M2=BF*HF*HF/2+N*ASB*(H-2.5) 1725.00
2268 Y2=M2/AT2 4.19 FROM TOP
2280 IHT=N*ASB*(H-2.5-Y2)^2 11343.67865
2290 IGC=IHU+IHT 13207.907
2300 REM Let MCR Cracking moment & FR as
modulus of rupture and YT as extreme fiber
stress from N.A. For cracked section
2310 FR=237.17*FC^.5 374.99 PSI
2320 MCR=FR*IGU/(H-Y1)*1/12000 61.53
2330 MC=(W1*LC^2/8-(MA+MB)/2-(MA-MB)/ 108.00 Ft kips
(2*W*LC^2)
2340 IE=(MCR/MC)^3*IGU+(1-MCR/MC^3)*IGC 16892.017
2350 IF IE < IGU THEN 2360 ELSE 2380 33,139
2360 IE1-IE 16892.017
2370 GOTO 2385
2380 IE1-IGC 16892.617
2385 IE2=IE1
2390 REM Determine effective moment of inertia of
negative region
2400 Y3=H/2 12.25
2410 IRU=1/12*BW*H^3 17,157
2420 REM Let IRC as moment of inertia of cracked
section i.e negative bending region
2430 REM Let Y4 extreme fiber stress of cracked
section from N.A
2440 REM Solve Y4
2445 Q=N*AST*(H-2.5)+(N-1)*ASB*2.5 1303.75
2450 R=N*AST+(N-1) *ASB 87.82
2460 S=SQR(4*R^2+8*BW*Q) 420.558449
2470 Y4= (S-2*R)/(2*BW) 8.746
2480 I4=N*AST*(H-2.5-Y4)^2+(N-1)*ASB*(Y4- 13377
2.5)^2+1/12*BW*Y4^3 + +BW*Y4*(Y4-Y4/2)^2
2490 REM Let IF as average moment of inertia to be
used for negative bending region let MCR2
cracked moment for negative bending region
2500 MCR2=FR*IRU/H/2*1/12000 43.7678 Foot kips
2510 I2=(MCR2/MA)^3*IRU+(1-(MCR2/MA)^3)*I4 13470
2520 IAV=1/2*(IE+I2) 15569.13
2530 REM Find multiplier for a long time deflection
2535 FP=2-1.2*ASB/AST 1.22733
2540 IF FP2<=0.6 THEN 2250 ELSE 2570
151
2550 FP1-FP
2560 GOTO 2580
2570 FP1=0.6
2580 FN=2-1.2*ASN/AST 1.65
2590 FAV=1/2*(FN+FP1) 1.43165
2600 BREAK
2595 PRINT” Review given numerical results then
type continue to resume running”
2610 REM Let YA as actual beam deflection
2615 REM We let D1,D2,D3,D4,& D5, D6 as
preliminary variable to arrived at actual beam
deflection
2620 D1=W1*X/24 1.7185
2630 D2=X^3-2*LC*X^2+4*MA*X^2/(W1*LC)- -5859.38
4*MB*X^2/(W1*LC)
2640 D4=1728*D1*(D2+D3)/(EC*IAV) 0.2014
2650 rem let pd&pl as percent dead load and live
load respectively
2660 D5=(D4*DL*FAV)/(W1*1000) 0.1225
2670 D7=PL*D4*LL/(W1*1000) 0.077
2680 D8=D5+D6+D7 0.309
2690 PRINT” Total deflection of member is equals 0.309
to the sum of immediate and sustained dead
and live loads=”D8;”Inches”
2673 DC=LC*12/480 0.650
2675 PRINT”Allowable deflection from code is
=”;DC;”Inches”
2680 PRINT’ Compare actual deflection and
deflection as per code requirements”
2685 PRINT” Revise section and make another run if
necessary or revise material strength
specifications”
2690 PRINT” This was programmed by Bienvenido
C. David on November 1982 in his hometown
Baguio City
2700 END
152
INTRODUCTION: For simply supported span the end moments is zero ant the
2
maximum positive moments for uniformly load w /per ft. is given by 1/8 wl . For continues
beams and frames the end moments is not equals to zero and usually negative at the faces of
2, 2 2
the interior and exterior support (1/10wl 1/12wl , & 1/9 wl ). The end moments varying
upon the type of loadings thus for a uniform load of w Lbs/Ft Please refer figure below as
shown. Approximate moment diagram only.
Ma Mb Mc
W Lbs per Ft.
Lc
Va Shear Diagram
Mb (maximum moment) Vc
Moment Diagram
Ma Mc Neg steel
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● Pos steel
153
BAR CUT OOF AND BEND POINTS

1) Every bar should be continued at least a distance equal to the effective depth of the
beam or 12 d bar diameter (whichever is the larger) beyond the point at which it is
theoretically no longer required to resist the stress.
2) At least one third (1/3) of the positive moment steel (one fourth in continuous span)
must be continued uninterrupted along the same face of the beam a distance at least
6” into the support.
3) At least one third (1/3) of the total reinforcement provided for negative moment at
the support must be extended beyond the extreme position of the point of inflection a
distance not less than one sixteen (1/16) the clear span or 12db,whichever is
greater.
BAR CUT OFF RECQUIREMENTS

If the positive bars are cut off, they must project past the point of theoretical maximum
moment, as well as d, or 12db beyond the cutoff point from the positive moment diagram.
The remaining positive bars must extend Ld past the theoretical point of cutoff bars and must
extend at least 6” into the face of the support.
Development length of deformed bars in Compression
a) Basic development length Ld -----------------0.02dbfy’’/fc’ but not less than 0.003dbld.

b) Modification factors to be applied to ld reinforcements in excess of that required by
analysis same as tension.
Development length of deformed bars and deformed wire in tension

A) basic development length ld
No 11 bars and smaller -----------------------------------0.045Abfy /fc’ but not to exceed

0.0004dbfy
No 14 bars --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------.0.85fy/fc’
154
No 18 bars ------------------------------------------------------- 0.11fy/fc’
Deformed wire----------------------------------------------------------- 0.03dbfy/fc’
B) Modification factors to be applied to ld

Top reinforcements (horizontal reinforcement so placed that more than 12” of concrete is
cast in the member below the bar) -------------------------------------------- 1.4
Reinforcement with fy greater than 60,000 psi (2-60000)/fy
Lightweight aggregate concrete when fc’ is specified 6.7.fc’/fct
when fct is not specified
all lightweight concrete ---------------------1.33
Sand – Lightweight concrete ---------------1.18
Linear interpolation maybe used when partial sand replacement is used.
Reinforcement spaced laterally at least 6 inches on centers with at least 3 inch clear cover
from face of member to edge bar ---------------0.8
Reinforcement in flexural members in excess of that required by analysis ----As required/As

provide
Reinforcement enclosed within spiral reinforcement not less than 1/4” in diameter and not
more than 4” pitch ----------------------- 0.75

19, 1970 PRC NO: 10170
DESCRIPTION: Bending of steel reinforcements & inflection points

155

Code
TITLE: Inflection points CODE NAME: Bendi-flect
MACHINE LANGUAGE : BASICA COMPUTER: Tandy Computer
Program steps: 75
LIBRARY MODULE: Floppy Disk PROGRAM NAME: Bendi-flect
CODE NAME: Bendi flect
Ma A w Lbs per foot Mb 2.5” b
● ● ●
h stirrups
A Lc ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● SECTION AA
Negative steel positive steel point of inflection bending of pos & neg steel
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
ELEVATION

Structures by George Winter Simplified Design of Reinforced Clarence w. Dunham.
Concrete by Parker
interpreted.
Concrete Design by Dean

Peabody Jr.
156
BEN-DIFLECT : Is a computer program that calculates the point of inflection of a continuous

reinforced concrete beams by the U.S.D. format method in English units. It plots on the monitor
screen bending of bars and determines whether the no. of bars at any section is adequate or
not. The program is written in Advance BASICA language and can be use in programmable
calculators . It can easily be integrated into the E _Review center of UC BCF.

If true branch out

Main program
If false
LINE NO STATEMENT SAMPLE ONLY FOR DE-

BUGGING PURPOSES
10 CALL CLEAR
15 PRINT “This is computer program no. 14. Finding
point of inflection i.e. bending of bars from exterior
column face and interior faces of column
respectively”
20 Print” This program was developed by Bienvenido
C. David, a Civil/structural Engineer on July 1983 in
his hometown at Baguio City, Philippines”
25 PRINT” For legends and drawings and other data’s
157
refer to program record”.

30 PRINT” Material unit’s specifications in Kips per
square inch, Linear dimension in inches, live and
dead load in pounds per foot & distance of column
to column in Ft.”
35 PRINT” If all data’s are in their respective units then
run line no 60”
50 STOP
60 CALL CLEAR
70 REM Let AS1,AS2,AS3 & AS4 required steel areas
Respectively at a distance Y1,Y2,Y3 & Y4 from
exterior column face
75 REM Let CA,CB & CC as coefficients of maximum
moment at exterior face, midspan and interior
faces of column
80 INPUT”FC,FY,CA,CB,CC”:FC,FY,CA,CB,CC FC=3.5, FY=50,
CA=1/14(0.0714285),
CB=1/16(0.0625) &
CC=1/9(0.11111)
85 INPUT”BW,H,HF,X,BF”:BW,H,HF,X,BF BW=6”,H=14”,HF=4”,X=12.5”
& BF=18”
90 INPUT”DL,LL”:DL,LL DL=275, LL=350, LC=25 Ft.
100 W1=1.4*DL+1.7*LL 980 Lbs/ft.
110 W1=W/1000 .980 Kips per ft.
120 MA=3/250*CA8W*LC^2 524.9735 Inch Kips
130 MC=3/250*CC*W*LC^2 816.64625 Inch Kips
140 REM Let XA & XB as distance from maximum
moment center line
145 XA=LC^2/4-(MA+MC)/W1
150 XB=(MA-MC)/(W1*LC)
160 XC=XB^2
170 XD=SQR(XA+XC) 145.36 Inches =12.114038 Ft.
180 REM with X0 & X10 as point of inflection and X as
point of maximum deflection then
190 X8-LC-X 12.5 Inches
200 X9= X-XD/12 0.385962 Inches
220 X10=X8-X9 0.385962
230 PRINT “Point of inflection from exterior column 0.385962 Inches
face =”X10;”Inches”
240 REM Determine required area of steel at Y1,Y2,Y3 &
Y4
250 REM At any point Y distance from column face
MX=W1/Y*(LC-Y)+(MA-MB)/LC*Y
158
260 Y=Y1
270 GOSUB 470
280 AS1=AS
290 PRINT” Area of steel at Y1 distance from column
face=”;AS1;”Square Inches”
300 Y-Y2
310 GOSUB 450
320 AS2=AS
330 PRINT” Area of steel at Y2 distance from exterior
column face=”;AS2;”Square Inches”
340 Y=Y3
350 GOSUB 450
360 AS3=AS
370 PRINT “ Area of steel at Y3 distance from exterior
column face=”;AS3;”Square inches”
380 Y=Y4
390 GOSUB 450
400 AS4=AS
410 PRINT” Area of steel at Y4 distance from exterior
column face=”;AS4”Square Inches”
420 PRINT” Programmed by Bienvenido C. David on July
1983 at Baguio City”
430 PRINT” Designed by Bienvenido C. David a
Civil/Structural Engineer on July 1983 at Baguio
City, Philippines”
450 REM This is a sub routine one
580 M1=W1/2*Y*(LC-Y)*12+(MC-MA)*Y/LC-MC
585 M=ABS(M1) -734.41
590 D=H-2.5 11.5”
600 IFD^2-2.61*M/(FC*BW))<0 THEN 605 ELSE 615
605 PRINT “Dept of stress rectangular block a is
610 STOP
615 A= D-SQR(D^2-2.61*M/(FC*BW))
620 AST=M/(0.90*FY*(D-A/2))
625 P=AST/(BW*D)
630 PN=.2/FY
635 PM=0.541875*FC*87/FY/(87+FY)
640 IF P>=PN THEN 650 ELSE 680
650 PRINT” Actual steel reinforcement ratio governs”
660 P1=P
670 GOTO 700
680 PRINT” Minimum steel reinforcement ration from
159
code governs”
690 P1=PN
700 IF P1<=PM THEN 710 ELSE 730
710 P2=P1
720 GOTO 750
730 PRINT” Maximum steel reinforcement ratio from
code governs”
740 P2=PM
750 P3=P2
760 AS=P3*BW*D
770 RETURN
780 END
160
In This chapter, the working stress method of design is compared to the ultimate
method of design giving the designer a guide where to apply the two design formats. Discussions
of rectangular columns in four cases are all explained . The first case concentric compression, the
second case the balanced eccentric compression, the third case the eccentric compression
and the fourth case the eccentric tension. Formula derivations applicable to different cases were
derived by the author for computer application. An interesting feature of this chapter is the use of the
PROGRAM DES-COL PROGRAM NO 15 & and PROGRAM ANAL- COL PROGRAM
NO 16, how the two programs are used in designing a rectangular column subject to combined
bending and axial loading. Interaction diagram is also presented in the succeeding pages showing the
relationship of the three modes of failures.
A column is any member which carries an axial compression load with or without the presence of axial
bending . Members such as strut (usually found in trusses either in buildings, highways and railways
bridges) is usually classified as a column). To be more particular, our discussion on columns will be
applied to buildings and other vertical structures.
In general , columns are classified in accordance with the reinforcement that is

used.
a) Tied columns in which reinforcements consists of longitudinal bars and separate lateral ties.
b) Spirally reinforced columns in which closely spaced spirals encloses a circular concrete with
longitudinal tie bars.
c) Composite columns, having a structural steel or cast iron column thoroughly encased in
concrete reinforced with both longitudinal and spiral reinforcement.
d) Combination column Consisting of structural steel encased in concrete at least 2 1/2” thick.
161
ANALYSIS
As mentioned earlier, test results conducted at Lehigh University and University of Illinois
indicates that at higher loads the strain diagram of steel and concrete does not coincide closely to the
strain based on the W.S.D. method. Due to this findings, the U.S.D. method (Ultimate Strength Design)
was formulated. The A.C.I. code of 1963 edition permits the use of either the W.S.D. or the U.S.D.
method, the choice is left to the designer. However in the 1977 or 1983 A.C.I. code, the U.S.D.
method is the principal analysis used. Textbooks appearing on the market are based entirely on this
concept.
In less developed countries , a question of prime importance to the Structural Engineer is where to
apply the U.S.D. method.
U.S.D. method emphasize a strict quality control of materials, strict supervision and quality
workmanship. As an example a structure was constructed based on the U.S.D. format, material
specifications is Fc’ = 3000 P.S.I. and Fy = 50000 P.S.I the original workmanship factor is taken as 0.90 as
usual batch of concrete will be by weight. The site is located at 30 kilometers from the nearest
laboratory. During construction a sample of the material is brought for testing. The owner demands
that the structure be finished in one day , the aggregates were taken from nearby roadside. There is no
adequate supply of water, thus concrete curing is neglected . Workmen from nearby locality are not
skilled. proportioning of concrete is done by volumetric measurement. Slump test were never
conducted thus workability of concrete is a guess technique. After seven days , the Engineer brought
the samples with the following results in tabulated form.
DESIGNED ACTUAL USED DURING YEID STRENGTH OF YIELD STRENGTH OF

SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTIONS AS STEEL SPEFIFICATIONS STEEL AS PER
CONCRETE PER LABORATORY LABORATORY RESULTS
RESULTS
3000 P.S.I 2500 P.S.I 50000 P.S.I 40000 P.S.I
When the structure was finished , the clearance of steel reinforcement deviates from the standard 2.5”
to 2”. Using author’s derived formula we solved the required area of steel based from the design
material specifications.
As = (bdfc – (bdfc)2 – 2bdfcMu/ ))/fy here Mu = 223 Inch Kips = 0.90 b = 12’ d= 16 “
fc= 3KSi and Fy = 50 KSI substituting in the above formulas.
162
As = ((12 x 16 x 3) – (12 x 16 x 3)2 –(2 x12 x3 x112/0.90))/50 which when simplified gives As =
0.1586 In2
Based from the test results with b=12” and d=16.5” fc’ – 2.5 K.S.I. and fy=40 K.S.I the original moment
factor then is found to be doriginal/dactual 0.90 = (.90) = .872
Substituting the above values in the author’s derived formula we have a new value of As
As = ((12 x 16.5 x 2.5 ) – (12 x 16.5 x 2.5)2 –(2 x 12 x 2.5 x 112.5/0.872))/40 =0.197004 In2
Since this is quite larger than the previous calculations, there is a possibility that the
structure will fail.
In contrast to the U.S.D. method , the W.S.D. method stipulates that the stress use in design
computation be reduced by a factor of 66% of that of the allowable compressive stress of concrete and
60 to 70 % reduction factor for the yield strain of steel . If fc’= 3000 P.S.I, the equivalent design stress
will be 0.45 x 3000 = 1575 P.S.I and for steel Fy =0.36 x 50000 = 18000 P.S.I. and for the test results
fc =0.45 x 2500 = 1 125 P.S.I and for steel fy 0.36 x 40000 = 14400 P.S.I.
From these calculations , it is evident that whether the steel used does not meet the required material
yield strength and on the other hand the required compressive strength is not attained , nor quality
workmanship is observed still the W.S.D. method has a factor of safety far greater than the u.s.d.
method . From the above examples , we can therefore conclude where quality workmanship is not a
standard practice. The W.S.D. method is safer to use than the US.D format.
The working stress theory is beyond the scope of this book, the designer is referred to “The
Theory and Practice of reinforced Concrete” by Clarence W. Dunham or Simplified Design of
reinforced Concrete” by Parker
The U.S.D. method of column analysis will be used in the computer solution both combined bending
and axial loading.
For combined loading and axial loading, the A.C.I. code provides reduction factor. For tied column
0.90 and for spirally reinforced member . The reduction factor is
similar to 0.90 for rectangular beams and 0.85 for shear and diagonal tention. With these factors and
using the the 1977 or 1983 A.C.I. code notations. The strength design then would be Pd = Pn =
.70Pn and
Md= Mn where the symbols Pn and Mn are nominal axial and nominal moment respectively.
163
RECTANGULAR COLUMN ANALYSIS

In the figure below is a section of column, the equivalent stress and strain distribution. We let Ast = as
tensile area of tension steel and Asc area of compression steel. If the steel is placed symmetrically then
Ast = Asc = At/2
2.5” Asc ec .85Fc’
● ● ● c es Cs
d N.A h Cc
● ● ● (d-c) Ts
Ast b es
FIG A FIG B FIG C
SECTION STRAIN DIAGRAM STRESS DIAGRAM
A TYPICAL STRUCTURAL SECTION

A E I M
3rd floor
B F W lbs.Ft w Lbs/ft J 2nd floor
C G K O
D H L P 1st floor
FIG 2.4 J
E ↶ ↷ ⇩
B l2 L1 G
164
Pn =Nominal axial load at ultimate in Kips
Mn = Nominal bending moment in foot kips
d = Distance of centroid tensile area from outer face of column.
Ts = tensile force of tension steel in Kips
Cs = Compressive force of steel compressive region in Kips
a= Depth of stress rectangular block at ultimate in inches
e’ =Lever arm of Pn based from centroid tension steel in inches
ec= Strain of concrete at ultimate = 0.003 at failure
es’ = Strain of compression steel = Fy/29000
es = Strain of tension steel at ultimate = Fy/29000
c = Distance from neutral axis to extreme fiber of concrete = a/0.85
Let us consider the structural frame shown in fig 2.4 for the continuous beam B-F—J a free
body diagram is shown below. In the free body diagram since w1 = w2 and l1= l2 it follows
that MFB= MFG the unbalance moment then is equals to Mu=MFB – MFG = 0. When the
unbalance moment is equals to zero, this is known as concentric compression. Again for frame
G-K-O the loading is not symmetrical Mgk is greater or lesser than MKO either MGK OR MKO is
greater or lesser or vice versa, an unbalanced moment is produced at column J-K-L. The
unbalanced moment can be verified from the free body diagram of JK as shown on the figure.
2.4
MJK= MGK – MOK in kips. If an unbalance moment occurs, the analysis required is different
from that of concentric compression, an eccentricity is introduced. The 1977 A.C.I. code
notation denotes this eccentricity by e and can be computed by the formula e = the
165
subscript u means the ultimate loads and this kind of loading is usually referred to as eccentric loading.
Eccentric loading has two meaning eccentric tension and eccentric compression which will be
discussed later.
Concentric compression results when the eccentricity ratio is zero (0). The point of application of Pn
must coincide thru a point known as plastic centroid. If we let as the distance of Pn from the centroid
of tension steel then from the figure below.
As .85fc’
● ● Cs
Pno P.C. h h N.A
● ● Ts
At FORCE DIAGRAM
The axial force Pn would be the sum of the two materials concrete and steel neglecting the area
displaced by the steel bars then summation of forces horizontal equals zero ∑ we have
Pn = .85fc’(b)(h) + Asc(Fy) + Ast (Fy) (1) thus for a cross section (example only) b = 14”,h=18”
, fc’=3000p.s.i. and Fy=50000k.s.i. we have Pno = 0.85(3000)(14)(18) + 2(50000) + 2(50000) = 842600
Pounds.Also taking moments about centroid tension steel (i.e. same figure) we have
= For symmetrical steel reinforcements, the centroid of cross
section coincides with the plastic centroid.
Concentric compression occurs when the moment (exterior and interior faces of column are
equals to each other) that is Mu1 = Mu2 so that the net moment is equals to zero therefore
e = (Mu1 – Mu2)/Pu = 0 For continues reinforced concrete frames and beams, the moments in
the column face is not equals to zero and for corner columns the magnitude of the moment is
greater than the moment in the interior columns. Due to the unbalance moment a different
analysis is formulated. We call this eccentric compression. Analysis of eccentric
compression and tension, eccentric tension and eccentric compression are discussed under
program no 15 & 16.
166
166
ANALYSIS & FORMULA DERIVATIONS FOR COMPUTER APPLICATION
Program no 15 code name Des-Col is all about eccentric compression, eccentric tension.
Eccentric compression occurs when the actual eccentricity ea is equals to the balanced eccentricity eb
of the actual cross section of the column. Interior columns usually have an eccentricity less or equals to
the balanced eccentricity eb in comparison to corner columns. For eccentric compression a different
analysis is required. Consider the figure below as shown. eu
Pn Ast .85fc’
● ● ● Cs Cc C ec
es’ y d N.A.
Asc d-c
● ● ● Ts es
A Section B Force Diagram C Strain Diagram
because of the eccentricity e due to unbalance moment Mu, the point of application Pn lies at a distance
e reckoned from the N.A (neutral axis) of the section. The equivalent strain diagram is shown on figure
C. The neutral axis shifts from the original concentric compression by a distance say Y. The new N.A can
be solved by the formula C= assuming that compression steel yields then from the stress
diagram summation of forces horizontal equals zero ∑ we get Cc – Ts + Cc = Pn (Equation 3).
As the eccentricity e increases so does Y( the deviation from original concentric compression) increases
causing the area of stress rectangular block decreases and respectively Cc decreases, the right hand
term of equation 3 Pn approaches (Cc – Ts) as a limit. There will be a point along the cross
section of the column where the tension steel, compression steel and compression concrete block Cc
167
will fail simultaneously. We call this the balance point and the eccentricity at that point is designated
by eb. It is customary to find the nominal load at balance point we designate the load by PnB. Since
concrete failure commence at ec and es’ and es commerce at e = fy/29000 substituting these values
in the strain diagram and putting eu = ec = 0.003 diagram figure C we get cb = eu/(Ey +
eu)(d) = (d) with Es as the modulus of elasticity of steel = 29x106 we get Cb =
(d) (Equation 5) Equation 5 is the formula to locate eccentricity at balance load,

given material strength specifications and column section.
From the stress diagram figure B summation of forces horizontal ∑ equals to zero Cs and Ts
cancels each other so that a = (Equation 6) but ab = B1(Cb) (equation 7) with B1 =
0.85 and ab depth of stress rectangular block at balance load. Equating (6) and (7) and
substituting the value of Cb from equation 5 in equation 7 we get the nominal balance load
PNB = 0.72(FC’) (B) (D) ( = 0.72(FC’) (B) (D) ( ) (Equation 8)
Equation 8 is known as balanced load. For computer application
LEGENDS
Fc = Cylinder strength of concrete at ultimate (K.S.I)
Fy = Yield strength of steel at ultimate (K.S.I)
H = Larger dimension of column in inches
B = Smaller dimension of column in inches
EB = Balance eccentricity of section in inches
EA = Actual eccentricity of loading in inches
Ec = Yield strain of concrete at ultimate (0,003)
Ey = Yield strain of steel at ultimate = Fy/29000

168
ES = Yield strain of steel at ultimate = 29000
ES’ = Yield strain of compression steel at ultimate
d = Depth of column in inches
d’= Depth of compression & tension steel (lever arm)
MATHEMATICAL STEPS
a) Compute PU & MU
b) Compute EA = MU/PU
C) Referring to program record (figure) summation forces horizontal equals to zero Pnb = 0
d) Cc = A (0.085) (Fc’) (A) (B)
*** Note taking moments at centroid compression steel
Pnb(E1) = Pnb(D-AB/2) + ASC(Fy)(D-5) Equation 1
*** Put PU = Pnb Equation two
also E1 = EB + (h-5)/2 Equation 3
with equation ,1,2, and 3 known solve unknowns with given data’s. Note if compression steel
yields i.e. must not exceeds Fy/29000
COMPUTER OUTPUT
PUTTING = 1 Computer evaluates cross sectional area of column with side S.
Putting T = 2 Computer evaluates with given area of steel dimension B and dimension H, a
rectangular section results.. Putting T = 3 with given small dimension B computer solves
dimension H and area of steel.
Putting T = 4 with given larger dimension H computer solves small dimension B and required
area of steel
program line no 10 -90 is a guide. When computer encounters a value of 2 it goes to line 240
computes sides of column S then jumps to program line 540 by a goto statement performs line
169
540 to 560. A gosub statement at 660 computer takes the value of D and perform sub –
program 680-800 which checks whether compression steel yields or not.
*** Note there are instances for architectural reasons dimensions at balance load is not
possible. Revising any numerical output obtained may yield different design capacity of
section. Co0mputer program no 16 code name Anal Col will be useful in analyzing this type of
problem.

19, 1970 PRC NO: 10170. PTR NO: 345678 at Baguio City 1983
DESCRIPTION: Design of columns at balance load. Simultaneous failure

of concrete, compression steel and tension steel

Code
TITLE: Design of columns at balance load CODE NAME: Des - Col
MACHINE LANGUAGE : TI BASICA COMPUTER: T I - 99
Program steps: 83
LIBRARY MODULE: Floppy Disk PROGRAM NAME: Des - Col
CODE NAME: Des - Col
CORNER COLUMN INTERIOR COLUMN

170
Pn Ast .85fc’ ec
● ● ● Cs Cc a Cb ec ( Cb–2.5)
es’ y d N.A.
Asc d-c
● ● ● Ts es
COLUMN SECTION AT BALANCE LOAD PROGRAM NO 15

interpreted.
Concrete Design by Dean Simplified Design of Reinforced Strength of Materials by

Peabody Jr. Concrete by Parker Ferdinand Singer

171
DES - COL : Is a computer program that that designs a rectangular column at balance load
(simultaneous crushing of concrete, yielding of compression steel & tension steel
simultaneously). Given axial load and bending moment in one direction, computer solves
require unknowns for a specified given data’s. Factor for column load is given as .70 and live
load and dead load factor are 1.4 & 1.7 respectively. For less developed countries or where
workmanship factor is a must the factor 0.70 and dead and live load factors may be reduced.
The program is written in Advance BASICA language and can be use in programmable
calculators . It can easily be integrated into the E _Review center of UC BCF.

If true branch out

Main program
If false
LINE NO STATEMENT SAMPLE ONLY

FOR DE-
BUGGING
PURPOSES
10 CALL CLEAR
20 PRINT” This is design of column at balance load,
simultaneous failure of concrete, tension steel and
compression steel”
Bienvenido C. David, a Civil/Structural engineer on
Nov 1983 in Baguio City”
26 PRINT “ All material strength specifications in kips
per square inch , dimension of column in inches,
axial and bending moment in kips and foot kips”
30 PRINT” If all data’s are in their respective units then
172
run line number 100”

35 PRINT” Put T=1 For square section computer solves
area of steel and side S of square column”
40 PRINT” Put T=2 For rectangular section given area of
steel computer solves dimension B and dimension H
larger side of column section”
45 PRINT” Put T=3 For rectangular section given
smaller side of column computer solves other
dimension H of column and area of steel AS”
60 PRINT” Put T=4 For rectangular section given large
dimension H of column computer solves small
dimension B and area of steel AS”
70 Print” For legends and drawing refer to program
record”
120 INPUT”VALUE OF T”:T
130 PU = 1.4*PD + 1.7*PL 336.8 Kips
140 MU = 1.4*MD + 1.7*ML 273.65 Kips
150 EA = 12*MU/PU 9.75 Inches
160 EY = FY/29000 0.001724
170 X = 0.003/(EY + 0.003) .635055
180 PNB = PU 336.8 Kips
190 Y = PNB/(0.7225*FC*X) 209.726
200 IF T=1 THEN 240
210 IF T =2 THEN 300
220 IF T = 3 THEN 440
230 IF T = 4 THEN 500
240 J = Y + 1.5625 211.2885
250 D = SQR(J)-1.25 13.285
260 S = D+2.5 15.785 SAY 16
Inches
270 PRIN” Side of column S =”;S;”Inches”
280 B=S
290 GOTO 540
300 INPUT” Cross sectional area of steel”:AS 4
310 ABC = AS/2 2 Square Inch
320 Z = ABC*FY 100
330 PNB = Z/PNB + 0.50 -0.425*X 0.52701
173
340 EB = EA 9.75
350 Q = EB + Z*2.5/PNB – 1.25 9.2422
360 D = Q/R 17.537048
370 H = D + 2.5 20 Inches
380 PRINT” Larger dimension of column =”;H;”Inches”
390 B =Y/D 11.95 say 12 “
400 PRINT” Smaller dimension of column B=”;B;”Inches”
410 D=D
420 GOSUB 680
430 STOP
440 INPUT” Given smaller dimension b=”:B 12”
450 D = Y/B 17.477 Inches
460 H = D = 2.5 19.97 SAY 20”
470 PRINT “Larger dimension H=”;H;”Inches”
480 GOTO 540
490 STOP
500 INPUT’ Given larger dimension H”=:H 20
510 D = H-2.5 17.5 Inches
520 B = Y/D 11.98 say 20
Inches
530 PRINT” Smaller dimension of column B=”;B”Inch”
540 CB = X*D 8.4367
550 AB = 0.85*CB 7.17119 Inches
560 PNB = 0.85*FC*AB*B 336.76 Kips
570 L =PNB*(D-AB/2) 3266.4036
580 F = 1/2*FY*(D-2.5) 269.625
590 K = 1/2*(D-2.5) 5.3925
600 EB = EA 9.75
610 U = PNB*(EB + K) 5099.3883
620 AS =(U-L)/F 6.798
630 PRINT” Total area of steel AST=”AST;”Square
Inches”
640 PRINT” Select from tables appropriate no and bar
size”
650 D=D
660 GOSUB 680
174
670 STOP
680 REM This is a sub routine one
690 W = 0.003/(FY/29000 + 0.003) .635055
700 CB = W*D 8.4367
710 ES = 0.003*(CB-2.5)/CB 0.0021111
715 EY = FY/29000 0.001724
720 IF ES>EY THEN 730 ELSE 770
730 PRINT” Compression steel yields”
740 PRINT “Programmed by Bienvenido C. David , a
Civil/Structural Engineer on November 1983 in
Baguio City”
750 RETURN
760 STOP
770 PRINT” Compression steel does not yield”
780 PRINT “Programmed by Bienvenido C. David , a
Civil/Structural Engineer on November 1983 in
Baguio City”
790 RETURN
800 END
175
Program 16 code name (Anal – Col) which means analysis of column in two modes of failure. The
first case tension failure and the second case compression failure. When the moment such as corner
columns is extremely large that is the actual eccentricity ea is greater than the balanced ecentricy eb of
the section then failure is iniated by yielding of tension steel followed by the crushing of concrete.
ANALYSIS AND FORMULA DERIVATION FOR COMPUTER APPLICATION – First Case – Tension failure.
eu
Pn Ast .85fc’
● ● ● Cs Cc C ec
es’ y d N.A.
Asc d-c
● ● ● Ts es
FIGURE 10.5
Referring to the figure above (Figure A & B) as e (eccentricity) becomes large, the deviation of Y
increases so that Cc approaches zero (0) as a limit. If that happens Pn approaches (Cs – Ts) as a limit.
From the above mathematical expression, it is evident that for large eccentricity the nominal capacity
of section is very small. This clearly indicates why large eccentricity is very dangerous in corner columns
such as columns A,B,C& M as shown in figure 2.4
176
Test results indicate that failure is initiated by yielding of tension steel followed by the shifting of N.A
(neutral axis) towards the compression side of concrete (as verified by the figure C stress strain
diagram).
Assuming that at failure, the compression steel is also yielding so that Ast = ASC again based from the
stress diagram figure B applying summation of forces horizontal ∑ equals zero we have PNB
=0.85fc’ab = Cc. Taking moments about centroid tension steel with e’ as level arm of PN from
centroid tension steel we get PN(e’) = CC(d - ) + CS(d – d’) Substituting the value of Cc = PN =
0.85fc’ab and substituting the value of a from equation (6) we get a quadratic equation in PN in the
form
PN2/2(.85)(fc’)(b) + (e’ – d)PN – AS’fy(d – d’) = 0 Simplifying further and introducing p=
= and the parameter u = fy/0,85fc’b and dividing thru by d, we obtained the nominal
moment of section for large eccentricity.
PN = 0.85fc’bd – p – ( -1) + (1 – ) + 2p(u – (1 – )+ ) Equation (9)
CASE 1 FOR COMPUTER APPLICATION
ANALYSIS AND FORMULA DERIVATION FOR COMPUTER APPLICATION – Second Case – compression
failure.
When the actual eccentricity ea is less than the balanced eccentricity eb of the section then analysis two
prevails compression failure. Interior columns are likely to have small eccentricity comparable to
corner columns. Referring to figure 10.5 stress and strain diagram Summation of forces horizontal ∑ =
zero(0)
CC + CS = TS = PN Equation (10) By inspection from the figure 10.5 as e is less than eb or in other
way as e approaches zero (0) as a limit which is in fact the N.A (neutral axis) for concentric
compression, likewise Cc as a limit approaches Ccc becomes large so that the value of PN = CC + CS
– TS then from the strain diagram , with given column section by similar triangles the distance C is =
eu/(fs/Es + eu))d) and the tension steel stress fs = but c = taking moments
about centroid tension steel figure 10.5 A we have Pn(e’) = Cc (d – a/2) + Cs(d-2.5) Equation
(13) but e’ = eb +
177
Expressing C in terms of a (depth of stress rectangular block) and fs in terms of a a third degree
equation results in the form ( )a3 - ( )a2 – - AscFy
-87Ast)a –87 (0.85d)Ast = 0 A general cubic equation results in a third degree. This formula is
valid only for case three of column design and very useful for computer application. Eccentric
compression usually occurs in interior columns where the unbalanced moment Mu is less comparable
to the unbalanced moment at the corner columns.
3 2
If we let A the coefficients of a which is ( ) and B the coefficients of a which is equals to
-( ) and C the coefficients of a which is equals to
- AscFy -87Ast) then Aa3 + Ba2 + Ca + D = 0 Case two of column
design compression
failure
this becomes the general cubic equation (program no 1 Struct math solver 1 or program no 2
– struct math solver -Newton’s method of approximation
This clearly shows the importance of the two mathematical programs I & 2 that I
developed in relation to the application of computer in “Reinforced Concrete
Design” Author uses the General cubic program no 1 as a sub routine within the
main program.
Shown below is an equivalent inter action diagram between programs no 15 &

program no 16.
Compression failure program no 16 Anal Col
ec =
eb = Balanced Load program no 15 Des Col
program no 16 Anal Col Tension failure et =

178
LEGENDS AND DESIGN STEPS
B: Smaller Side of column
Asc Area of compression steel in square inches
Ast Area of tension steel in square inches
fc’ Cylinder strength of concrete in Kips per square inch
fy Yield strength of steel at ultimate
in kips per square inch
d Depth distance of tension steel to outer fiber of concrete
Cb Distance of extreme concrete fiber to N.A.
a Depth of stress rectangular block
e’ Distance of Ast from Pn
ey Strain at ultimate
ec Strain of concrete at ultimate (0.003)
es’ Strain of compression steel at ultimate
Pnb Axial force at column at balance load
Mnb Nominal moment at balance load
EA Actual eccentricity of applied loads
EB Eccentricity of given section at balance load
DESIGN STEPS
FIRST CASE - TENTION FAILURE –EA is greater than EB
1) Cs = Acs(Fy) 8) Pn = - X [(X2 – 4(Z)(M)]1/2

179
2) Et = e +(H-5)/2 9) a =
3) dc = h – 5
4) y = (h = 2.5) 10 c =
5) X = (et – y)
6) Z =1/(1.7(Fc’)(B) Note Resulting equation is ZPn2 + XPn + M = 0 for step no 8
DESIGN STEPS
SECOND CASE - COMPRESSION FAILURE – EA is LESS than EB
1) Compute for e = Mu/Pu = (Mu/Pu)
2) Compute for y = 3 Compute for f = y + e
4) Compute for d = h – 2.5 5) Compute for g = h – 5
6) Compute for x = 0.85(Fc’)(b)/2(f)
7) Compute for z = 0.85(Fc’)(b) -
8) Compute for N = Acs(Fy) + Ast(87) –
9) Compute for M = -0.85(87)(Ast)(d) = 73.95(Ast)(d)
10 ) Resulting equation is depth of stress rectangular block a cubic equation in the

format as Xa3 + Za2 = Na + M = 0
11) B = Z/X 12) C = N/X Resulting equation is: A3 + BA2 = Ca + D = 0
12) C = N/X 13) D = M/X 14) Solve for Cc = 0.85(Fc’)(A)(B)

180
15 Solved for Cs = ABC(Fy)
–
16) Solved for Ts = 17) Pn = cc + Cs + Ts
18) Compute for Pd = (Pn) where = .70
**** Note compare Pd and Pu revise section if necessary and re run program no
16
COMPUTER OUTPUT
Upon input of numerical data’s , computer evaluates eccentricity of section

compares actual eccentricity and solves capacity of column in Kips. In second case
of failure it prints on the monitor screen equation of the stress rectangular block
a and solves the depth a using the general cubic equation (program no 1 – Struct
math solver 1). Checks whether compression steel yields or not.
*** The program was written in a time sharing system environment and can be
easily integrated into the E _Review Centre of UC – BCF.

DESCRIPTION: Design of columns in two modes of failure. Eccentric

tension and eccentric compression
181

Code
TITLE: Design of columns in Two modes of failure CODE NAME: Anal -
Col
MACHINE LANGUAGE : TI BASICA COMPUTER: T I - 99
Program steps: 116
LIBRARY MODULE: Floppy Disk PROGRAM NAME: Anal - Col
CODE NAME: Anal - Col
Pn Ast .85fc’ ec
● ● ● Cs Cc a Cb ec ( Cb–2.5)
es’ y d N.A.
Asc d-c
● ● ● Ts es
COLUMN SECTION IN TWO MODES OF FAILURES PROGRAM NO 16

interpreted.
182
Concrete Design by Dean Simplified Design of Reinforced Strength of Materials by

Peabody Jr. Concrete by Parker Ferdinand Singer
ANAL - COL : Is a computer program that analyzes a rectangular in two modes of failure. this
program is a cross checked for PROG NO 15 – DES COL. Given dimension of column, area of
compression steel and tension steel in English units. Computer computes safe capacity of given
section either in tension case 1 or compression case two with a factor reduction of 0.70. The
user selects whether the assumed section is safe for design or not. He may revise the section or
area of steel reinforcement and repeat the run. The program is based on the Ultimate Theory
of Strength Design and conforms to the latest 1977 A.C.I code of practice. For architectural
reasons dimensions at balance load is not applicable so the user/designer revise his dimensions
and checks the safe capacity using this program no 16. Program is written in Advance BASICA
language and can be use in programmable calculators . It can easily be integrated into the E
_Review center of UC BCF.

If true branch out

Main program
If false

183
LINE NO STATEMENT SAMPLE ONLY FOR

DE-BUGGING
PURPOSES
5 CALL CLEAR
10 PRINT “This is computer program no 16
analysis of column”
15 PRINT ‘ See computer program record for
drawing and figure as well as program
description”
20 PRINT” If all data’s are in their respective
units then run line no 85”
30 PRINT” Material strength specifications in
Kips Per Square Inch, Dimensions of column
in inches, area of steel reinforcements in
square Inches”
40 Print” This programmed was developed by
Bienvenido C. David a Civil/Structural
Engineer in his hometown Baguio City on the
11 th of November 1983”
50 PRINT “This program is good only as shown
on the drawing”
80 STOP
85 REM let us determine which case the given
section of column will fail (First case or
second case)
90 INPUT”H,B,EA”:H,B,EA H=20,B=12,EA=15,6
Note first case
EA=6” Second case
EA=15”
95 INPUT”ABC,AST,FC,FY”:ABC,AST,FC,FY 2,2,3.5,50
100 D = H-2.5 17.5 Inches
110 EY =FY/29000
120 CB =(0.003/(EY+0.003))*D
130 A =0.85*FC*CB
140 PNB =0.085*FC*A*B
184
150 ET = (PNB*(D-A/2)+ABC*FY*(D-2.5))/PNB
160 EB =ET-(H/2-2.5)
170 IF EA=EB THEN 200
180 IF EA>EB THEN 290
190 IF EA<EB THEN 500
200 PRINT” This is case one it is actually program
no 15 code name Des-Col (Simultaneous
failure of steel and concrete at balance load
205 ESC =0.003*(A-2.125)/A
210 EY = FY/29000
220 IF ESC=>EY THEN 230 ELSE 250
230 PN = ABC*FY+0.85*FC*A*B-AST*FY
240 GOTO 260
250 PN = 87/A*ABC*(A-2.125)+0.85*FC*A*B-
AST*FY
260 PD = 0.70*PN
270 PRINT” Safe design capacity of column
is=”;PD;”Kips”
275 PRINT “This is first case of column design
failure at balance load”
280 PRINT “This programmed was developed by
285 STOP
290 PRINT” This is second case of column design
failure of assumed section by yielding of
tension steel”
300 ETS =EA+(H-5)/2
310 Y = H-2.5
320 G = ETS-Y
340 K =1/(1.7*FC*B)
350 M =-CS*(H-5)
360 N =G^2-4*K*M
370 L =N^.5
380 PNT =(-G+L)/(2*K)
390 AT = PNT/(0.85*FC*B)
185
400 CT =AT/0.85
410 EST =0.003*(CT-2.5)/CT
420 EY = FY/29000
430 IF EST=>EY THEN 440 ELSE 460
440 PN =CS+PNT-AST*FY
450 GOTO 470
460 PN =87/AT*ABC*(AT-2.125)+0.85*FC*AT*B-
AST*FY
470 PD =0.70*PN
480 PRINT “ This is second case of column design
safe capacity of column is =”;PD;”Kips”
485 PRINT “This programmed was developed by
490 STOP
500 V = (H-5)/2 7.5”
510 U =V+EA 13.5”
520 D =H-2.5 17.5”
530 W =H-5 15”
540 I = 0.85*FC*B/(2*U) 1.32222
550 J = 0.85*FC*B-0.85*FC*B*D/U -10.5777
560 T = ABC*FY+AST*87-ABC*FY*W/U 162.888
570 S =-73.95*AST*D -2588.25
580 E =J/I -8
590 F = T/I 123.193
600 C =S/I -1957
610 P =F-E^2/3 101.859
620 Q = C-E*F/3+2*E^3/27 -1666.91
630 R =P^3/27+Q^2/4 733789.9877
640 IF R<0 THEN 720
650 Z =-Q/2=R^.5 -1690.07
660 IF Z<0 THEN 690
670 ZA =Z^0.3333 11.88
680 GOTO 800
690 ZB =ABS(Z)^.3333 0
186
700 ZA =-ZB -11.88205

710 GOTO 800
720 O =ATN(ABS(R)^.5/(-Q/3))/3
730 PI =2.09439102
740 ZC =((-Q/2)^2-R)^.5
750 ZA =ZC^.3333
760 IF (-Q/2)>0 THEN 790
770 ZA =-ZA
780 XA = COS(O+2*PI)*(ZA-P/(3*ZA))-E/3
790 X = COS(O+PI)*(ZA-P/(3*ZA))-E/3
800 XB = COS(O)*(ZA-P/(3*ZA))-E/3
810 IF XA>0 THEN 840
820 IF X>0 THEN 870
830 IF XB>0 THEN 900
840 AC =XA
850 GOSUB 1040
860 PDXA = PDC
865 PRINT” Safe design capacity of column
is=”;PDC;”Kips”
869 PRINT “ Programmed by Bienvenido C.
David, a Civil Structural Engineer in his
hometown Baguio City on November 1983”
870 AC = X
880 GOSUB 1040
890 PX =PDC
894 PRINT “ Safe design capacity of column
900 AC = XB
1000 GOSUB 1040
1010 PDXB =PDC
1025 PRINT “Safe capacity of column
187

1030 STOP
1040 REM A sub routine
1050 ES = 0.003*(AC-2.125)/AC
1060 EY =FY/29000
1070 IF ES=> EY THEN 1080 ELSE 1130
1080 PNC =ABC*FY+0,85*FC*AC*B-
87*(AST)*(0.85*D-AC)/AC
1090 PDC =0.70*PNC
1100 RETURN
1110 STOP
1130 PMC = 87*ABC*(AC-
2.125)/AC+0.85*FC*AC*B-AST*87*(0.85*D-
AC)/AC
1140 PDC = 0.70*PMC
1150 RETURN
1160 END
188
INTRODUCTION
A building or a bridge is generally considered two have two main portions, the
superstructure and the substructure, the latter is known as foundation. What is a
foundation?
Foundation is a very important in Civil Engineering Structures, author based from experienced
observes a good foundation design, for example is seldom appreciated. Owners who are willing
to spend large sums of money for external beautification are at times reluctant to spend even
small sums for proper soil investigation. They fail to realize that however beautiful the
exteriors, the structure will not perform its functions properly unless there is a good
foundation support. Even more regrettable is the fact that there are Structural Engineers and
Architects who do not appreciate the integral relationship between the superstructure and the
foundation of a building and therefore reduce construction cost by economizing the
foundations; This false economy often proves expensive in the long run.
Let us site three examples
1) A newly built first class hotel in one of the Southeast Asian countries had to cut three stories
from the building during construction because of the possible danger of foundation failure.
189
2) An office building costing 5 million dollars showed sudden excessive settlement at the
completion of the construction. The cost of underpinning and of repairing the structural
damage was more than 500000 dollars, an amount twice the original cost of the foundation.
3) An 18 storey office building used precast concrete piles for its foundation. During
construction, the contractor using ordinary driving equipment claimed that he had driven a
large number of piles to a depth in excess of 200 Ft. A trained soil Engineer would not have
permitted continuation of the piling without an investigation. Subsequent load test proved that
most of the piles could not carry the design load and that most of them were probably broken,
as a result the construction was delayed for six months.
These few cases show the lack of proper soil investigation, of knowledge of soil mechanics, of
proper control during construction or a combination of any of these factors can spell failures
for a project. from these case histories, it is evident that foundation designs play an important
role in the “Structural Engineering “profession.
The foundation supports the superstructures, but it may consist various parts of its own. There
are many kinds of foundations, raft, mat, caissons or structures supported by piles.
Chapter eight is all about the most common type of footings encountered by the “practicing
Civil Engineer or Architect met in everyday practice namely the square footing, the rectangular
footing, the combined footing and the trapezoidal footing. The combinations of the two
mathematical programs “General cubic equation and Newton’s method of approximation are
included within the main program as sub routine programs within the main program.
The method of attack used in footing design is similar to that in beams, however since footing
rest on a medium such as soil or rock, a combination of “Soil Mechanics, “Rock Mechanics”
and “Structural Design” is essential to understand the analysis involved. These topics are
sometimes included in textbooks on “Soil Mechanics”,” Rock Mechanics” and others in
“Foundation Engineering”.
The ultimate strength theory will be used thru out with both English units and metric
units.
There are six critical stresses developed in footing design.
1) Dowels into the footing
2) Strength of soil beneath footing soil pressure q

190
3) Shear strength
4) Bearing (compression) from column face on top of footing
5) Reinforcement provided.
6) Development length of bars.
,
191
Square footing or simply known as Spread Footing from the world alone means to distribute the
concentrated load over a large area which has a lower intensity of pressure, sometimes this is called an
isolated footing and used generally to distribute the load from the base of the column. The depth is
usually controlled by diagonal tension. Let us consider the figure, the perimeter in shear for a square
column is 4(w + d) and the depth to the centre of the steel area is d. The soil pressure on the base of
the footing is q = . Summing forces vertical ∑ on the diagonal tension. The footing weights
cancels
2
which gives Pu = (w + d) q + 4d’ (w + d)vc = 0 rearranging terms we get
d2(vc + ) + d(vc + )w = (BL – W2)/4 Equation (1)

to facilitate the design of footings, various charts are published by the A.C.I. code. The quantity
(A2)/(A1) should not be less than 2 equation 1 is the general equation for solving the depth
of footing a quadratic equation and very useful in computer application.
L A1
B 2 2
d 1 1
A2
ART. 11.10.1A Bearing pressure on top of footing

192
However a direct formula derived by the author can be used to solve the depth of
footing directly it may be used also for a sub – routine program in lieu of the standard
mathematical expression used by the author. (See design steps or program no 17 code
name “Square Foot’).
● ●
● ●
Column reinforcement with ties
d ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
B 2” or 2.5” covering
Square Footing with column section
(3.4v1 + Pu)d12 + s(3.4v1 + 2Pu)D1 = Pu(A – a2) here the legends
v1 = Nominal shearing stress caused by the column load shear.
Pu = Ultimate column load
d1 = Effective depth of footing with respect to v1
S = Side of column
A = Area of footing in plan. The above mathematical expression is helpful for computer
application . rather than using the design steps outlined, we treat the mathematical expression
directly to solve depth of footing.
DESIGN STEPS
1) Compute footing dimensions
2) Convert Qa to ultimate
3) Find effective depth d (Diagonal punching shear usually governs)
4) Compute required steel for bending treat a unit strip as a cantilever beam.
193
5) Checked bearing pressure on top of footing
6) Compute development length and area of dowels
7) Sketch and design footing
MATHEMATICAL STEPS
Find PU = 1.4*D + 1.7*L
Find footing size S = l’ = (S – W)/2
Compute for Mu = Qul2/(2)(12) Inch Kips
Compute for Qu = Pu/S2
Compute for Vc = 15.48( )
Solve for A = (Vc + Qu/4)
Solve for B = (Vc + Qu/2)/w
Solve for C = (S2 – W2)Qu/4
Solved for d = Ad2 + Bd – C = 0 a quadratic equation
Solve for As = 10.2*Fc’/Fy( 12d± 144d2 – 0.2178Mu/Fc’ )
LEGENDS
Fc = Kips per square inch
Fy = Kips per square inch Vc = shear strength of concrete
Mu = Inch Kips P = Concentrated load in Kips
d = In inches L = Live loads in Kips
As = Square inch per foot. W = Width of column

194

DESCRIPTION: Design of Square Footing by U.S.D. format

Code
TITLE: Design of Square Footing by U.S.D. format CODE NAME:
Square - Foot
MACHINE LANGUAGE : IBM BASICA COMPUTER: IBM
Program steps: 88
LIBRARY MODULE: Floppy Disk PROGRAM NAME: Square - Foot
CODE NAME: Sqr - Ft
● ●
(w + d) Y ● ●
Column reinforcement with ties
d ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
B diagonal punch shear B 2” or 2.5” covering
PLAN ELEVATION Square Footing with column section
V=2 Vc = 4 Code article 11.10.1a wide beam shear

195
REFERENCE TEXTBOOKS: Foundation & Structures By Foundation Of Structures By

Foundation Analysis & Gregory Chebotariof Clarence w. Dunham.
design By Joseph Bowles
interpreted.
Soil Mechanics In Strength of Materials by

Engineering Practice By R. Ferdinand Singer
Peck & Hansen
SQUARE FOOT : Is a computer program that designs dimension of square footing. It calculates
size of square footing with side S given axial load in kips (concentric loading and material
strength specifications). Computer computes required area of steel reinforcements per foot of
width and checks actual steel reinforcement ratio from code requirement 1977. It checks
allowable soil pressure and bearing pressure on top of footing and the required development
length of steel, area of dowels included in accordance with the A.C.I. code specifications
.Program is written in Advance BASICA language and can be use in programmable calculators
. It can easily be integrated into the E _Review center of UC BCF.
196

If true branch out

Main program
If false
LINE NO STATEMENT SAMPLE ONLY FOR

DE-BUGGING
PURPOSES
5 CALL CLEAR
10 PRINT” This is design of Square Footing by U.S.D.
method in English units”
15 PRINT “ Consult drawing and program record for
legends and symbols”
20 PRINT “ Be sure all given data’s are in their respective
units dead load in Kips , material strength
specifications in Kips per square inch dimension of
column in inches”
25 PRINT “ If all data’s are in their respective units then
run line no 60”
50 STOP
60 CALL CLEAR
70 REM This program was developed by Bienvenido C.
David a Civil/Structural Engineer in his hometown
Baguio City year 1984
75 INPUT”LL,DL,FC,FY,W1,QA”: LL,DL,FC,FY,W1,QA Example only
LL=100,DL=71,
FC=3,FY=50,W1=14,QA=4
80 W =W1/12 1.1666 Ft.
85 S = ((DL+LL)/QA)^.5 6.53 Ft
90 PRINT “Side of footing=”S;”Feet” 6.53 ft.
100 PU = 1.4*DL+1.7*LL 269.4 Kips
110 QU =PU/S^2 6.3180112
120 VC =15.48*FC^.5 26.8113 Ksf
197
130 A = VC+QU/4 28.3908

140 B =(VC+QU/2)*W 34.96
150 C = (S^2-W^2)*QU/4 65.207
155 E =(B^2+4*A*C)^.5 92.88011
160 D =(-B+E)/(2*A) 1.0199626
170 D1 =12*D 12.239
180 PRINT” Depth of footing=”;D1;”Inches” 12.239 Inches
190 REM Determine required steel reinforcement area per
foot of width
200 LC = (S-W)/2 2.6817
220 MU = 6*QU*LC^2 272.81642 Inch Kips
225 IF (144*D^2-0.2178*MU/FC)<0 THEN 230 ELSE 245
230 PRINT “ Value of F is negative not possible review
given data”
235 STOP
245 F = SQR(144D^2-0.2178*MU/FC) 11.40239
250 G =10.2*FC/FY 0.612
255 H = 12*D-F 0.837161
260 AS = G*H 0.51234 Square inch
270 PI = 0.006944*AS*D 0.003628
280 GOSUB 540
290 AS4 =P4*D1
300 PRINT” Area of steel per foot of width=”;AS4;”Square
Inches”
310 PRINT” Select from tables no and bar diameter sketch
and draw footing then type continue to resume
running”
315 BREAK
320 INPUT” Diameter of selected bar in inches”:DB
330 L1 = 12*LC-3 29.1804
340 GOSUB 680
350 LD = LD 29.1804
360 PRINT”Recquired development length as per A.C.I. 29.1804
code requirement is =”;LD;”Inches”
379 REM Check bearing pressure on top of footing
380 A1 = 144*W^2 195.9779
390 A2 = (12*W+48*D)^2 3963.6191
400 K = (A2/A1)^.5 4.497
410 IF K>=2 THEN 420 ELSE 440
420 T=K
430 GOTO 450
440 T=2
198
450 F1 = 0.595*FC*T 3.57 **Here T = 2

460 F2 = PU/(12*W)^2 1.374 Ksi
470 IF F1>=F2 THEN 480 ELSE 510
480 PRINT” Actual stress on top of footing is less than
A.C.I. code limitations design okay”
Bienvenido C. David, a Civil/Structural Engineer in his
hometown Baguio City on the 10th of October year
1984”
500 STOP
510 PRINT “Actual bearing stress is greater than A.C.I.
code”
Bienvenido C. David, a Civil/Structural Engineer in his
hometown Baguio City on the 10th of October year
1984”
530 STOP
540 REM This is sub – routine one Checking of steel
reinforcement ratio within A.C.I. code limitation
550 PN = 0.2’FY 0.004
560 PM = 0.6375*FC/FY*87/(97+FY) 0.0226377
570 IF P1=> PN THEN 580 ELSE 600
580 P2 – P1
590 GOTO 610
600 P2 = PN 0.004
610 IF P2 =< PM THEN 620 ELSE 640
620 P3 = P2
630 GOTO 650
640 P3 = PM
650 P4 = PM 0.004
660 RETURN
670 STOP
680 This is a sub – routine two required development
length as per A.C.I. code
690 L2 = 0.0993463*FY*DB^2/FC^.5 11.20 Inches
700 L3 = 0.4*DB*FY 12.5 Inches
710 IF L1>L2 THEN 730
720 IF L2>L3 THEN 760
725 GOTO 780
730 IF L1>L3 THEN 740
740 L4 = L1
750 GOTO 790
760 L4 = L2
199
770 GOTO 790

780 L4 = L3
790 LD = L4
800 RETURN
810 PRINT” Here LD is the required development length
(i.e. the largest of the three quantities)
200
Rectangular footing design is similar to square footing design except that wide beam
shear probably controls the depth of the footing. The reinforcement in long direction is again
uniformly distributed over the pertinent shorter width. In locating the bars in the short direction, one
has to consider that the support provided to the footing by the column is concentrated to the middle.
Depth will be controlled by shear except that wide beam action will probably control if the
length exceeds the width by a ratio greater than one.
Percentage of steel required in short direction to be placed in zone width B E= where E =
percentage of total steel required in short direction to be placed in zone of which of width B
and S is the ratio of long side to short side L/B. Below section and plan
Dowels
Steel bars in short direction
d ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Steel bars in long direction
d L’
B S
PLAN AND SECTION

201
SUGGESTED DESIGN STEPS
1) Find footing size B & L
2) Find depth D for shear, check wide beam first for a strip of 1 Mtr. wide at a distance d from
column.
3) Find steel As required in long direction.
4) check diagonal tension approximate
5) Find steel As in short direction allow placing short side steel on top of longitudinal steel
6) Check if actual steel reinforcement ratio is within A.C.I. code allowable
7 Check bearing and design of dowels
8) Check development length required as per A.C.I. code
9) Design and sketch section
10) Revise section if necessary
LEGENDS
Fc = Cylinder strength of concrete at ultimate in K.S.I. VCD = 4
Fy = Yield point of steel at ultimate K.S.I.
Qu = Ultimate soil pressure F1 = Allowable bearing pressure on top of footing as per A.C.I.
code
d = Depth of footing in meters
B + Smaller dimension of footing in meters
L = larger dimension of footing in meters
Pm = Maximum steel reinforcement ratio from code
Pn = Minimum steel reinforcement ratio from code
F2 = Actual bearing pressure on top of footing.

202

19, 1970 PRC NO: 10170
DESCRIPTION: Rectangular Footing Design by the U.S.D. method

Code)
TITLE: Rectangular Footing Design CODE NAME: RECT FOOT
LIBRARY MODULE Floppy Disk PROGRAM NAME: Rect Foot PTR
NO: 337066 Feb 1984 at Baguio City 01/09/1984
⇩ Pu
Dowels L
w
L’
Ast Ast B w w
d ● ● ● ● ● ● w
Ast
● ● ● ● ● ● E = 2/(S+1)
B (L-B)/2 B (L-B)/2
Longitudinal steel bars uniformly spaced Code article 15.4.4
SHOWN ABOVE SECTION AND PLAN BOTH LONG & SHORT DIRECTION
203
REFERENCE TEXTBOOKS Foundation Of Structures By Gregory Chebotariof

Foundation Analysis & Design Clarence w. Dunham Foundations
By Joseph Bowles
interpreted.
RECT FOOT: Is a computer program that design and sizes RECTANGULAR FOOTINGS. The
U.S.D. method is used in this program using the international system of units in metric.
Computer solves dimension of footing given other dimension solves depth of footing then
check whether the depth of footing is okay for diagonal punch shear. It solves area of steel in
both long and short direction per meter width and checks whether actual steel
reinforcements ratio is in conformity with current A.C.I code of 1977 & 1983.Checks actual
bearing pressure on top of footings, design area of dowels and the required development
length of steel as per A.C.I. code requirements. The program is written in Advance Basica and
can be feed to a wide variety of programmable calculators and micro computers. The
program can be easily integrated into the E- REVIEW CENTRE OF UC –BCF.

If true branch out

Main program
204
If false
LINE NO STATEMENT SAMPLE ONLY

FOR DE-
BUGGING
PURPOSES
10 CALL CLEAR
15 PRINT “This is computer program no 18design of rectangular
footing in metric units by U.S.D. format.”
20 PRINT “ This program was developed by Bienvenido c. David
in his hometown Baguio City on the year February 1984
25 PRINT “ Material specifications in KG per Cm2”
30 PRINT” Dead and live loads in Kn”
35 PRINT” Linear dimensions of footings in Meters”
40 PRINT” Problem to solve other dimension and area of steel”
45 PRINT” For drawing and other data’s refer to program
record”
50 PRINT” If all data’s are in their respective units then run line
no 60”
55 STOP
60 REM First find other dimension given width of footing
65 INPUT”DL,LL,FC,FY,W1,W,QA,VCD,VCW,PN,PM”: Example only
DL,LL,FC,FY,W1,W,QA,VCD,VCW,PN,PM DL=1110, LL=1-
22,FC = 211,FY
=4219,W1 =
0.45,W = 2.2, QA =
240, VCD
=1283.7KN/M2,
VCW =642 Kpa,PN
=0.002,PM = 0.016
67 REM *** Notes data’s for PN, PM,VCW,VCD taken from
tables by Joseph Bowles “Foundation Analysis & Design”
second edition. By formula VCD = 4
70 L =(DL+LL)/(W*QA) 4.037 Meters
75 PRINT” Other dimension of footing =”;L;”Meters”
80 QU = (1.4*DL+1.7*LL)/(L*W) 370.59 K.P.A
205
85 REM Find footing depth

90 E1 = L/W 1.835
95 IF E1>1 THEN 100
97 IF E1<1 THEN 98
98 PRINT” Length exceeds width by a ratio of greater than 1
wide beam action controls”
99 STOP
100 L1 = L/2-W1/2 1.7935
110 D = L1*QU/(QU+VCW) 0.65638 Meters
115 PRINT” Depth of footing=;D;”Meters round up value to
positive integer if necessary”
120 REM Check diagonal tension
130 P =(W1+D)*4 4.42552
140 PS = V*VCD*D 3728.92105
150 PU = 1.4*DL+1.7*LL 3291
160 IF PS<PU THEN 180
170 IF PS=>PU THEN 200
180 PRINT” Punching shear greater than code requirements”
190 STOP
200 REM Solve steel reinforcements in long direction As
210 MU = 1/2*QU*L1^2 596.027 kn –Mtr.
220 X = FY/(1.7*FC) 11.76
230 Y =-D -0.65638
240 Z = MU/(0.90*98.07*FY) 0.00160058
250 R = (Y^2-4*X*Z)^.5 0.5962746
300 U = (-Y-R)/(2*X) 0.65638
310 P = AS/(1*D) 0.0038933
320 PN = 14/FY 0.002
330 PM = 0.016 From table
340 IF P=>PN THEN 350 ELSE 370
350 P1 = P 0.0038933
360 GOTO 380
370 P1 = PN 0.002
380 IF P1<= THAN PM THEN 390 ELSE 410
390 P2 = P1 0.0038933
400 GOTO 420
410 P2 = PM 0.016
420 P3 = P2
430 ASL = P3*1*D 0.002555
435 PRINT” Area of steel per foot of meter=;ASL;”Long direction”
450 REM Design of steel reinforcements in short direction
540 INPUT”FC,FY,WW1,D,DB”:FC,FY,W,W1,D,DB Example only=
206
322,FY = 4219
KG/Cm2,W1 =0.45
m,D = 0.65638, QU
= 375.59,L = 4.037,
DB = 20 MM-
(2CM)
536 PRINT” Select from table appropriate bar size no then type
continue to resume running”
537 BREAK
560 L2 =(W-W1)/2 0.875
570 MU = QU/2*L2^2 141.866
580 X = FY/(1.7*FC) 11.76
590 Y = -D+DB+DB/2 0.62638
600 Z = MU/(0.90*FY*98.07) 0.000380969
610 R = (Y^2-4*X*Z)^.5 0.611906
620 U = (-Y-R)/(2*X) 0.0006153
630 P = U/(1*D) 0.0009375
640 GOSUB 940
650 P4 = P3 0.002
660 AS =1*D*P4 0.0013127
670 AST = 10000*AS*L 13.127
675 Print” required area of steel in short direction
=”;AST;”Square Centimeters per meter width”
680 PRINT “ Select from tables appropriate bar size then type
continue to resume running for computation for bearing
pressure on top of footing”
685 BREAK
690 REM Checked bearing pressure on top of footing
700 A1 = W1^2 0.2025
710 A2 = (W1+4*D)^2 9.4588
720 C = (A2/A1)^.5 6.83448
730 IF C=> 2 THEN 750
740 IF C<2 THEN 770
750 G=2
760 GOTO 780
770 G=C
780 F1 = 58.35765*FC*G here G = 2 24626
790 F2 = (1.4*DL+1.7*LL)/W1^2 162.53.8
795 IF F1>F2 THEN 800 ELSE 815
800 PRINT “ Allowable pressure on top of footing as per code
requirement greater than actual bearing pressure”
810 GGOTO 820
815 PRINT” Actual bearing pressure greater than code review
207
material specifications”
820 AG = 50*W1^2 10.125
825 PRINT” Recquired area of dowels =”;AG;””Square Cm”
830 REM Compute required development length *** Note see
page 212 of Bowles about code requirements as per A.C.I.
code
840 LA = 20
860 GOSUB 1050
870 LD = LF 43.86 CMS.
880 “PRINT” Required development length =”;LD;”Centimeters”
890 PRINT” programmed by Bienvenido C. David, A
civil/Structural Engineer on Feb 1984 in his hometown
Baguio City”
900 PRINT” Designed by Bienvenido c. David”
910 STOP
920 REM A sub routine for computation of development length
940 IF P=>PN THEN 950 ELSE 970
950 P1 = P 0.000937553
960 GOTO 980
970 P1 = PN 0.002
980 IF P1<=PM THEN 990 ELSE 1010
990 P2 – P1 0.002
1000 GOTO 1020
1010 P2 = PM 0.016
1020 P3 = P2 0.002
1030 RETURN
1040 STOP
1045 REM Sub routine two
1050 LB =0.0004278FY*DB 36.030
1060 LC = 0.00755*FY*DB/FC^.5 43.8 Cms
1070 IF LA>LB THEN 1110
1080 IF LB>LC THEN 1140
1100 GOTO 1160
1110 IF LA>LC THEN 1120
1120 LU = LA
1130 GOTO 1170
1140 LU = LB
1150 GOTO 1170
1160 LU = LC
1170 LF = LU
1180 RETURN
1190 END
208
208
Combined footing is a special case of spread footing. Combined footing are used if columns are so
close to the property line that single column footings cannot be made without projecting that line
and if some adjacent columns are so close to each other that their footing would merge. In designing a
combined footing the resultants of column loads must coincide to the centroid of the footing area to
prevent eccentricity. Depth is usually based on either wide beam shear or diagonal punch
tension. First criteria, determine d based on wide beam shear with d obtained checked diagonal
tension for three conditions:
1) 3 side zone column one
2) 4 side zone column two P1 P2
3) 3 side zone column two ⇩ ⇩
SECTION
d ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
soil pressure Lbs/Ft. soil pressure Lbs/Ft
F1 F2
Lc
PLAN
209
SUMMARY STEPS
1) Determine column loads appropriate for considerations of settlements. These consist of dead
loads plus only a portion of live load specified for design of column.
2) Using the resultant of the loads in step one, select the plan dimension of the footing to obtain a
uniform soil pressure that does not exceed the pressure appropriate for this condition of loading.
3) Using the column load specified in the building code (without load factors) and the plan dimensions
determined in step two, calculate the corresponding soil pressure. If the maximum soil pressure
under this loading exceeds the value considered appropriate for this condition of loading , the
width of the footing must be increased whereas the position of the centroid must remain unchanged.
4) Compute the soil pressure beneath the footing corresponding to the column loads multiply
by appropriate load factors.
5) Draw shear and moment diagrams for the footing when it is subjected to the maximum of
step four.
6) Using step five as the basis for design, determine the depth of the footing and the necessary
amount of reinforcing steel at appropriate locations.
MATHEMATICAL STEPS FOR THE FORMULATION OF PROGRAM NO 19

*** Please refer to chapter 3 or chapter 4 for formula derivations
1) Depth of stress rectangular block is given as a = 144d2 – 2.61M/Fc/12
where d is the depth of footing, M is the moment in Inch Kips and Fc is the cylinder strength
of concrete at ultimate.
2) development bond i.e. for compression bars
ld = 0,02fydbfc’ or 0.0003fydb or 8 “
ld = 0,24 fydbfc’ or 0.044fydb or 200 mm where Ab area of bar in In2 or mm2
fy Yield strength of steel. PSI or MPa db bar diameter in or mm
fc 28 day compressive strength of concrete, P.S.I. or MPa vu =

210

19, 1970 PRC NO: 10170
DESCRIPTION: Design Of Combined Footing By U.S.D. format

Code)
TITLE: Design Of Combined Footing CODE NAME: FOOT COMB

LIBRARY MODULE: Floppy Disk PROGRAM NAME: FOOT COMB
P1 P2
⇩ L ⇩
SECTION
d
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
SOIL PRESSURE SOIL PRESSURE
P1 P2
Lc
B PLAN
F1 F2
211
SHEAR DIAGRAM
MOMENT DIAGRAM
REFERENCE TEXTBOOKS: Foundation Design By Soil Mechanics In
Foundation Analysis & Gregory Chebotariof Engineering Practice By
Design By Joseph Bowles Charles B. Peck
interpreted.
FOOT COMB Is a computer program that sizes and designs a Combined Footing by US.D.
analysis in English units. Computer finds the dimensions L & B, determines shear and moment
212
equation and plots on the monitor screen shear & moment equation. Computer solves the
depth of footing for both wide beam and checks the depth d obtained for diagonal tension.
Draw negative steel between column one and two. Designs steel reinforcement in short
direction in accordance with the A.C.I. code of 1977 and checks steel reinforcement ratio
within A.C.I. code allowable. Checks bearing pressure on top of footing and the required
development length in feet all in close conformity with A.C.I. code of 1977. The program is
written in advance basica language and can be feed to programmable calculators, personal
computers. Can be easily incorporated to the E. REVIEW CENTRE OF UC – BCF.

If true branch out

Main program
If false
LINE STATEMENT SAMPLE ONLY FOR DE-

NO BUGGING PURPOSES
5 CALL CLEAR
10 PRINT” This is design of Combined Footing by U.S.D.
method in English units using the 1983 A.C.I. code”
15 PRINT “ This program was developed by Bienvenido C.
David a Civil/Structural Engineer on September 1984
in Baguio City”
20 PRINT” For legends and other data’s please see
drawing and computer program record”
25 PRINT “All units of length in feet, material strength
specifications in kips per square inch, dimensions of
column in inches, dead load and live load in kips and
soil allowable pressure in kips per square foot”
run line no 60”
50 STOP
213
60 REM Find footing dimensions step one

65 INPUT”W1,W2”:W1,W2 12” 15”
70 INPUT”DL1,DL2,LL1,LL2QA,LC”: DL1,DL2,LL1,LL2QA,LC Example only DL1=60K,
DL2=110K,LL1=60K,LL2=90K,
QA =2,LC=15 Ft
75 INPUT’FC.FY:FC,FY 3 Ksi , 60 ksi
80 P1 =1.4*DL1+1.7*LL1 186 Kips
85 P2 =1.4*DL2+1.7*LL2 307 Kips
90 P = DL1+DL2+LL1+LL2 320 Kips
95 UR =(P1+P2)/F 1.54
100 QU = QA*UR 3.08
105 P3 = P1+P2 493Kips
130 X = P2*LC/P3 9.341 Ft
140 L = (X+W1/24)*2 19.682 Ft
141 REM Note for value of L round to integer no
145 PRINT “Length of footing in Feet=”;L;”Feet”
150 B = P3/(L*QU) 8.13 Ft
155 PRINT “W width of footing =”;B;”Feet”
160 Y = L/B 2.417
165 REM Determine moment equation by integration
180 QB = QU*B 25.05
190 V = QB*X
200 VM = P1
210 VCW = 7.74125*FC^.5 13.4K.S.F
220 D = VM/(VCW*B+QB) 1.39 Ft
225 PRINT “Depth of footing =”;d;”Feet” 1.39 Ft
230 REM Check D obtained for diagonal tension
240 C = (24*D+3*W1)/12 5.78 Ft
250 A = (W1+6*D)*(W1+12*D)/144 4.05 Square Ft
260 VD = P1-A*QU
270 VCD = 15.48251*FC^.5 26.8 KS.F
280 VC = VD/(C+D) 21.63 K.S.F
290 REM Check shear stresses at column 2
300 A2 = (W2+12*D)^2/144 6.96
310 V2 = P2-A2*QU 285.6 K
320 C2 = 4*(W2+12*D)/3 10.56
330 V3 = V2/(C2*D) 19.4 K.S.F
340 PRINT “Actual shear stress at column one=”;VC;”KSF”
360 PRINT “Actual shear stress at column two=”;V3;”KSF”
365 PRINT “Allowable shear stress from code=”;VCD;”KSF” VC =21.63,V3=19.40 &VCD
=26.80
370 PRINT” Compare actual shear stress from code stress”
214
400 STOP
410 REM Design of negative steel between column one
and two
420 INPUT”P2,VM,FC,FY”: P2,VM,FC,FY 307,186,3,60

430 INPUT”QB,B,L,D,W1,W2”:QB,B,L,D,W1,W2 QB
=25.05,B=8.13Ft,L=19.682Ft,
D=1.39’Ft,W1=12
Inch,W2=15Inch
440 X =VN/QB 7.425 Ft
450 M1 = 12*(QB/2*X^2-VM*(X-W1/24) -7170.468 Inch kips
460 MU = ABS(M1) 7170.468
470 M – MU
480 GOSUB 710
490 ASL = B*AST 1.043
500 PRINT” Total no of bars required in long
direction=”ASL;”Square Inch”
510 REM Design of steel in long direction
520 L1 =(W1+9*D)/12 2.04 Ft
530 QC = VM/(L1*B) 11.38 Ft
540 LU = = (B-W1/12)/2 3.565 Ft
550 M2 = QC/2*LU^2*12 867.78588
560 M = M2
570 GOSUB 710
580 ASW = L1*AST 8.47 Square Inch
590 PRINT” Total area of steel reinforcements in short
direction=”;AST;”Square Inches”
595 PRINT” Select from tables appropriate size and bar no
then type continue and press enter to resume
running”
600 BREAK
605 REM Design of steel in short direction column two
610 L2 = (W2+18*D)/12 3.335
620 L3 = (B-W2/12)/2 3.46
630 QD = P2/(L2*B) 11.56
640 M3 = 6*QD*L3^2 830.35 Inch Kips
650 M = M3
660 GOSUB 710
670 ASS = L2*AST
680 PRINT” Total area of steel reinforcements in square
inches at column two=”ASS;”Square Inches”
685 PRINT””Select from tables appropriate bar size and
no. then type continue and press enter to resume
215
running”
690 BREAK
700 STOP
705 REM A sub routine one Computation of steel areas
710 IF (144*D^2-2.61*M/(FC*12))<0 THEN 715 ELSE 730
715 PRINT “Depth of stress rectangular block is imaginary
720 RETURN
725 STOP
730 A = 12*D-SQR(144*D^2-2.61*M/(FC*12))
735 AS = M/(0.90*FY*(12*D-A/2))
740 P = AS/(144*D)
750 PN = 0.2/FY
755 IF P>=PN THEN 770
760 IF P<PN THEN 790
770 AS1 = AS
780 GOSUB 800
790 AS1 = 144*D*PN
800 AST = AS1
810 RETURN
820 STOP
890 REM Computation of development length
900 LA = LU*12-3 39.79 Inches
905 PRINT” Select bar diameter in inches”:DB 0.785 Inch
910 LB = 1.2649*3.1416/4*DB^2*FY/FC^.5 26.29 Inches
*** Note simplifying further line no 910
910 LB = 0.99345246*DB^2/FC^.5
920 LC = 0.4*DB*FY 21 Inches
930 IF LA>LB THEN 960
940 IF LB>LC THEN 990
950 GOTO 1010
960 IF LA>LC THEN 970
970 LD = LA
980 GOTO 1020
990 LD = LB
1000 GOTO 1020
1010 LD = LC
1020 LE = LD
1025 PRINT “Development length=”;LE;”Inches”
1030 FC1 = 0.85*0.7*FC 1.785
1040 PC1 = W1^2*FC1 257
1045 PRINT “Actual load on top of footing=”;PC1;”Kips”
216
1050 PRINT” Allowable load from code=”;FC1;’Kips”

1055 PRINT” Compare PC1 and FC1”
1060 AG1 = 0.005*W1^2 0.72 Square Inch
1070 PRINT “Area of dowels required=”AG1;”Square Inch”
1075 A2 = W2^2 225
1090 A3 = (W2+48*D)^2 6678
1100 A4 = (A3/A2)^.5 5.448
1120 IF A4=>2 THEN 1140 ELSE 1160
1140 G=2
1150 GOTO 1170
1160 G = A4
1170 FC2 = 0.85*0.70*G*FC 3.57 K.S.I
1180 PC2 = W2^2*FC2 803.25 Kips
1190 PRINT’ Allowable load on top of footing at column two 3.57
as per code requirement=”FC2;”KSI”
1195 PRINT” Compare value of PC2 and FC2 make revision if
necessary”
1200 END
217
In this program I have attached a classical solution (analytical) to illustrate

clearly how the classical solution is cast into the digital solution.
Trapezoidal footing is in fact a combined footing where one side is bigger than the other,
as in the case of combined footing, the centroid of column loads must coin side with the
centroid of the trapezoidal pressure diagram. The second condition, the total bearing pressure
of the trapezoidal diagram must equal to the resultant column loads. With these conditions
two equations are formed with unknowns B1 and B2. Please see figure below
M = AX3 + BX2 + CX + D
B1 C1 C2 B2
L
218
Here B1 and B2 are footing dimensions from both ends. From the figure below with L as
footing length outside to outside then B1 = - 1) Equation (1)
and B2 = ( ) - B1 Equation (2) here is the center of gravity of base from the outer
edge of footing larger end a shown on the figure above.
= (2B1 + B2)/ (B1 + B2) Equation (3) Equating this to C.G of column loads and solving
equation 1 and 2 simultaneously. The numerical values B1 and B2 are evaluated.
Since width varies from end to end. It is necessary to compute the required area of steel
reinforcements per meter width. This problem can be analyzed by the analytical solution
presented. In the computer programmed the author used the substitution method to solve B1
and B2 rather than using the simultaneous equation program code name simul bas as a sub
routine program within the main program. In areas of steel determination, author use a one
dimensional array to solve steel reinforcements in ten elements. See program listing.
Bearing pressure is important in footing design. Bearing pressure is obtained by soil testing or
from past construction records, building codes. An approximate empirical formula for bearing
capacity factors is given by the formula.
qultimate = Cnc + 0.5By1N1 + Y2DfNq for strip footing where Nc,By1, Nq are soil bearing
capacity factors whose values depends on the angle of internal friction. C = cohesion of soil
below footing level Y1 is the effective unit weight of soil below soli level. B = footing width
and Df is the depth of footing below lowest adjacent soil surface and qult. = Ultimate gross
bearing capacity or soil bearing pressure (developed by Terzhagi). For cohesive soil factor for
shallow strip footing qult.= CNc = 5.2C. When bearing capacity equations is used in design, it
is convenient to apply a factor of safety between 2.5 and 3 to the value of q ultimate. The q
design factor therefore is qdesign = qultimate/3 or qdesign = qultimate/2.5
For square footing: qultimate = 1.2CNc + .4Y1BNY + Y2DfNQ where a1 and a2 are shape
factors related to length to width (L/B) ratio.
219
Listed below are tables for different values of L/B
L/B a1 a2
1 1.2 0.42
2 1.12 0.45
3 1.07 0.46
4 1.05 0.47
6 1.03 0.48
Strip 1.00 0.50
For circular footing with radius R Qultimate = 1.2CNc + 0.6Y1RNY + Y2DfNq
The following table gives allowable bearing pressure
Value in short tons per foot square.
KINDS OF SOIL MINIMUM MAXIMUM USUAL

Quick sand and 1/2 1 1/2
alluvial soli
Soft clay 3/4 3 2
Wet clay and soft 1 4 2
wet sand
Clay and sand in 1 4 2
alternative layers
Firm and dry loam or 2 4 3
hard clay, dry clay or
fine sand
Sand confined 1 4 3
Compact coarse sand 3 6 4
or stiff gravel
Sand and gravel well 5 10 6`
compacted
Good hard pan or 5 10 8`
hard shale
Rock 5 25 15
220
ANALYTICAL SOLUTION
Design a trapezoidal footing given data as shown below. Area for columns = 0.46m2 (side)
Property Line D1 = 1,200 D2 = 900
P1 P2 L1 = 816 Kn L2 = 660 Kn
2100 KN 1476KN fc’ =211 fy= 4,219 Kg/cm2
⇩ 5.48 mtrs ⇩ qa 190 Kpa
.46 mtrs Step 1 Find qultimate
Ultimate ratio:
5.94 mtrs q ult = = 1.52 and qultimate =190(1.52) = 289.5 Kps
program line no 5 to line no 90
Step 2 Find end dimensions (i.e Resultants of column loads must coincide with resultant load
area). Taking moments at centre line column 1 we get and let as C.g of loads resultants
5449.2( ) = 5.489[1.4(900) + 1.7(600)] Solving for = = 2.395
and X’ = 2.395 + 0.46/2 = 2.625 from property line and from the area of the trapezoid
A= (5.94) but required area of footing based on ultimate load and ultimate soil
pressure is A = = = 18.823 Equating A we have two equations
in two unknowns dimensions a and b (5.94) = 18.23 Simplifying further we get
= 6.338 equation (1) Another condition is to prevent eccentricity, resultant of

column loads must coincide resultant of trapezoidal area. The was previously solved to be
2.395.
221
The C.G of a trapezoid is given as = = 2.625 or
= = 1.326 Equation (2) b = 6.338 - 2.065 substituting this
value to equation (2) we have = 1.326 from which a = 6.338(1.326 –

0.326)
a = 2.065 Meters and back substitution we get b = 6.338 – 2.065 = 4.273 Meters
program line no 100 to 190
Step 3 Draw shear and moment See figure below (pressure diagram).
y = 1237 – 107.5X
1273 597.82
5.94 Mtrs.
PRESSUE DIAGRAM
From pressure diagram big end is = PBig end = 4.273(289.5) = 11,2373.03 KPA/M
and Psmall end = 2.065(289.5) = 597.82 KPA/M so the slope of the pressure diagram
–
is =S= = 107.5 From the figure above, the
shear at any section X – X is qdx therefore dv = ydx but Y = (1237 – 107.5X)
hence substituting the value of Y We get dv = (1237 – 107.5X)dx and the total
shear by integration is therefore V =
V = - 53.75X2 + 1237X + C The constant C can be computed by the fact that at X =

0.23 m C = 0 also at X = 0.23 + dx C = -3067 also at column two X = 5.71 C = -
222
3067 with constant C known the shear at any section between faces of column 1 and 2 is
2
therefore equals to V = 1237X – 53.75X – 3067 = 0
In a similar manner the moment at any section can be found by integrating the shear
53.75X2 + 1237X + C)dx The total moment then is found
equation dm = (-
by integration M = - 53.75 2dx + 1237 +C
and simplifying further yields to M = -107.5X3/6 – 1237X2/2 – C’X’ = 0

The constant of integration can be found immediately, by inspection at X = 0.23m X’ = 0 so
3
/6 – 1237X2/2 – 3067(X
that the moment equation r at any section is M = - 107.5X
– 0.23) valid only up to the faces between column s only.
The point of maximum moment is found to be 2.828 by differentiating

M with respect to X and equating the derivative to zero. (i.e. = 0)
BELOW IS A graph of SHEAR AND MOMENT equations.
V = 1237X – 53.75X2 – 3067

223
M = - 107.5X3/6 + 1237X2/2 – 3067(X – 0.23)
STEP 4 Find depth for wide beam shear at small end check diagonal tension at large end.
Reasoning Vb/Vs = = 1.2 b/a = 4.27/2.06 = 2.07 From A.C.I. code
maximum shear occurs at a distance d from column two .Putting X = 5.48 – d in the shear
equation
V = 1237X – 53.75X2 – 3067 we get V = 1237(5.48 – d) – 53.75(5.48 – d)2 – 3067
V = 2095.5 – 647.5d – 53.75d2 Net shear at section
The shear carried by concrete is at that section is equals to Vc = Wd(d)(Vc)

5.94 2.06 From the figure by proportion
4.27 = from which the width is
is W = 2.065 + (D + 0.46) simplifying
Y/2 further we get 2.065 + 0.37d + 0.17 = 2.24 + 0.372d

224
From tables Vc = 642 KPA substituting this value in the safe resisting shear of concrete at
that section we get Vc = (2.24 + 0.372d)d(642) Equating this to the actual shear at that section
we get the folloeing equation (2.24 + 0.372d)d(642) = 2095.5 – 647.5d – 53.75d2 Simplifying
further we get 292.6d2 + 2.085d – 2095.5 = 0 *** A quadratic equation can be solve easily by
completing squares or by the quadratic formula. Solving for d we get d = 0.89 Meters.
In determining the area of steel reinforcements in the long direction since width varies across
the length take 10 distances from the column face say 0.6, 1.2, 1.8, 2.4, 2.28 (max) , 3 , 3.6,
4.8 & 5.94.At any section X-X along the longitudinal section
W = Width = B – (X) = 4.27 – 0.37205X = 4.27 – X
W = 4.27 - 0 .37205X at any section
V = Shear at any section is equals to = 1237X – 53.75X2 – 3067

3 2
M = Moment at any section is equals to = 107.5X /6 – 1237X /2 – 3067(X –
0.23) and As = area of steel reinforcements at any section is equals to
As = . below in table form the required area of steel at different distances
along the longitudinal section of the footing.
X V , KN M KN –M W M As cm2/M REMARKS
0 0 0 4.27 0 The maximum steel
permitted by the code is
153.3 CM2mtr, The minimum
steel is =32.48cm2/mtr
0.6 -2344.6 -916.1 4.05 8.2
1.2 -1660.6 -2115.8 3.83 20.4
1.8 -1015.4 -2916.6 3.6 30.2
2.4 -408.9 -3342.0 3.38 37.2
2.28(Max) 0.0 -3428.7 3.22 42.0
3.0 159.0 -3415.0 3.16 41.2
3.6 688.1 -3159.0 2.94 40.6
4.8 1630.3 -1752.4 2.49 26.1
5.94 0.00 0.00 2.07 0.00
To solve for the point of inflection equate moment equation to zero and solve for X
225
M= 107.5X3/6 – 1237X2/2 – 3067(X – 0.23) = 0

Author used “Newton’s method of approximation program – Program no 2 –Struct math
solver 2) to solve for the real positive root of X)
The following computer program shows how a one dimensional array of advance basica can
be put to advantage in computing the required area of steel reinforcements as previously
calculated by the analytical method.
This line no is the same as the first
Let us begin with line no 140 column of the table on page 224
140 DATA Note example only 0.6, 1.2, 1.8, 2.4, 2.8, 3.0, 3.6, 4.84, 5.94
150 M (Q) = A*X (Q) ^3 + B*X (Q) ^2 + C*X (Q) + D
160 V (Q) = E*X (Q) ^2 + F*X (Q) + G
170 W (Q) = H – (H – J)/LC*X (Q)
180 D1 (Q) = V (Q)/ (W (Q)*VC
190 M1 (Q) = ABS (M (Q))
195 MU (Q) = M1 (Q)/W (Q)
200 R = FY/ (1.7*FC)
205 P = -88.263*FY*R
210 N = 88.263*FY This line no is the same as the fifth column of table page 224
215 Z (Q) = MU (Q)/P
220 K (Q) = N*D1 (Q)/P
225 I (Q) = Z (Q) + 0.25*K (Q) ^2
230 AS1 (Q) = Z (Q) ^.5 - .5*K (Q)
240 AS2 (Q) = Z (Q) ^.5 + .5*K (Q)
250 PRINT AS2 (Q)

226
260 NEXT Q this line no is the same as the third column of table page 224
270 PRINT M(1);M(2);M(3);M(4);M(5);M(6);M(7);M(8);M(9);M(10)
275 PRINT V(1);V(2);V(3);V(4);V(5);V(6);V(7);V(8);V(9);V(10)
280 PRINT W(1);W(2);W(3);W(4);W(5);W(6);W(7);W(8);W(9);W(10)
This line no is the same as the second column of table page 224
This line no is the same as the first column of table page 224
The following program is how the program no 2 “Code name Newton can be used to locate
the point of inflection (bending of steel reinforcements “We start at line no: 285)
PRINT “Locate point of inflection. Let us use “Newton’s method of approximation “
290 PRINT” This is Newton’s method of approximation to solve for the real positive root”
295 PRINT” Try a value of X as first trial root X = LC/2 say 2.97 or 3
300 PRINT “If all coefficients are known then run line no 310”
305 STOP
310 CALL CLEAR
360 INPUT”Coeffecients of A, B, C, D”: A, B, C, D A = -17.936, B = 618.5, C = -3067, D =

705.41
370 INPUT “How many trials T: T
380 INPUT ‘Value of X as first trial”: X 3:00
390 P = 1
410 PRINT “Assume trial root is=”; X
420 REM Format is AX3 + BX2 + CX + D
430 Y = A*X^3 + B*X^2 + C*X + D

227
440 IF Y = 0 THEN 450 ELSE 470
450 PRINT” Real root is=”; X
460 STOP
470 T = T-1
480 IF T= 0 THEN 490 ELSE 500
490 STOP
500 R = X
510 GOSUB 580
520 X = S
530 P = P+1
540 PRINT”I am now performing trial no=”; P
550 PRINT “Trial root is=”; X
560 GOTO 430
570 STOP
590 M = A*R^3 + B*R^2 + C*R + D
600 N = 3*A*R^2 + 2*B*R + C
610 S = R-(M/N)
620 RETURN Negative steel reinforcements
630 END
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ●
Positive steel reinforcements
LONGITUDINAL SECTION
228
DESIGN STEPS FOR COMPUTER APPLICATION
1) The footing geometry necessary for a trapezoidal shaped footing is a =
and =( }
SUGGESTED MATHEMATICAL STEPS
1) Find q ultimate.
2) Find end dimensions
3) If time permits draw shear and moment diagrams.
4) Determine pressure diagram at Big End and Small End.
5) Design flexural steel, since width varies one should check As for several locations.
6) Checked steel in short direction same as rectangular footing using appropriate zone
w + 0.75d
7) Check bearing pressure and development length of steel reinforcements.
8) Detail and sketch footing
9) *** Note author use a one dimensional array to solve for M, V, D & As for different
locations.
LEGENDS
DL1 = Dead load acting on footing 1
DL2 = Dead load acting on footing two
LL1 = Live load acting on footing 1
LL2 = Live load acting on footing 2
UR = Ultimate ratio factor

229
QU = Ultimate allowable soil pressure
A = Dimension of footing small end
B = Dimension of footing big end
D1 = Depth of footing column 1
D2 = depth of footing column 2
ASS1 …….2….3….4 Subscripts for required area of steel at every locations along footing length.
As = in metric conversions
Vc = 0.17 wide beam shear.
Vcd = (0.17 + 0.16/B) Diagonal tension
Moment equation for Trapezoidal Footing is
M = A1X3 + B1X2 + C1X + D1 = 0 Equation (1)
V = A1X2 + B1X + C1 Equation (2)
To locate point of inflection solve for X for M= 0

19, 1970 PRC NO: 10170
DESCRIPTION: Design Of trapezoidal Footing By The U.S.D. format

230

Code)
TITLE: Design of Trapezoidal Footing CODE NAME: TRAP – FOOT
COMPUTER PROGRAM STEPS: 225
LIBRARY MODULE: Floppy Disk PROGRAM NAME: TRAP - FOOT
P1 p2 s
w/2
b F1 F2 a
SECTION
2( + c/2)<s
1/3<x’<1/2
F1 F2 Rectangular footing is too short to reach
column two
PLAN
Negative steel reinforcements
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●● ●
● ● ● ● ● ●
LONGITUDINAL SECTION
Positive steel reinforcements
REFERENCE TEXTBOOK: Foundation Of Structures By Foundations By Gregory

Foundation Analysis and Clarence W. Dunham Chebotarioff, Soli Mechanics in
231
Design By Joseph Bowles Engineering Practice By Peck &

Hanson
interpreted.
TRAP FOOT Is a computer program that designs a Trapezoidal Footing using the U.S.D. format
of analysis in Metric Units. Computer evaluates dimensions of footing a & b and find d (depth
of footing) based on wide beam shear, it then checks the calculated depth for dia gonal
tension all in conformity with the 1977 A.C.I. code in metric units. Computer determines
shear and moment equations plots on the monitor screen equation of shear and moment
diagram. Designs steel reinforcement areas in long direction at every ten locations. Computer
solves the point of inflection (point of zero moment) by the general cubic equation and
checks it by the Newton’s method of approximation. Computer solves required development
length for bond and allowable pressure on top of footing. The program is written in Advance
Basic and can be feed to a wide variety of programmable calculators and micro computers.
Can be easily integrated into the E REVIEW CENTRE OF UC –BCF.

If true branch out

Main program
232
If false
LINE STATEMENT SAMPLE

NO ONLY FOR
DE-BUGGING
PURPOSES
5 CALL CLEAR
10 PRINT” This is design of Trapezoidal Footing by U.S.D. method in
Metric units”
15 PRINT” This programmed was developed by Bienvenido C. David in
his hometown Baguio City o the 11th of November 1984.”
20 PRINT” For drawing and program description see attached
program record no 20”
25 PRINT “ All material strength specifications in Kg/Cm2, dimensions
of footing big and small end in meters, dead and live load small
and big end in KN allowable soil pressure in KPA and linear
dimensions in meters.”
30 PRINT “If all data’s are in their respective units then run line no 50”
40 STOP
50 REM Step 1 Find Q ultimate
55 INPUT”DL1,DL2,LL1,LL2,FC.QA.LC”: DL1,DL2,LL1,LL2,FC,QA,LC DL1 = 1200, DL2
= 900, LL1 =
816, LL2 =660,
FC = 211, QA =
190, LC = 5.48
60 INPUT”W1,W2”:W1,W2 0.46,0.46
65 PU1 = 1.4*(DL1 + DL2) 2940
70 PU2 = 1.7*(LL1 + LL2) 2509
75 P3 = DL1 + DL2 + LL1 + LL2 3576
80 P4 = 1.4*DL2 + 1.7* LL2 2382
85 UR = (PU1 + PU2)/P3 1.52
90 QU = QA*UR 289.5 KSF`
100 PU3 = PU1 + PU2 5449.20
110 X1 = P4*LC/PU3 2.395
120 X2 = X1 + W2/2 2.625
130 REM X2 Distance in meters from centerline of column 1 to centroid
of column loads
140 LC1 = LC +W1/2 + W2/2 5.94
150 A1 = PU3/QU 18.823 Sq
meters
160 Y = A1*2/LC1 6.3377 MTERES
233
170 Z = 3*X2/LC1 1.325 Meters

180 A = Y*(Z – 1) 2.0597 Meters
190 B = Y-A 4.278 Meters
200 PRINT” Width of footing at small end in meters=”;A;”Meters” 2.06587 Meters
210 PRINT” Width of footing at big end in meters=”;B;”Meters” 4.27 meters
220 REM Determine depth of footing in meters
230 REM Determine shear equation by integration
240 QA = A*QU 597.82
kpa/meter
250 QB = B*QU 1237.03
KPA/Meter
260 QS = (QB – QA)/LC1 107.5 KPA
270 P1 = 1.4*DL1 + 1.7*LL1 3067 Kips
280 R = QB*LC-QS/2*LC^2-P1 2097
290 U = QS*LC-QB 107.5 KPA
295 C = B-A 2.2183
300 INPUT “Value of wide beam shear VCW”:VCW 642 KPA
305 REM Value of VCW from Bowles table 8.2 page 213 is VCW =
2 units in Kn/m2
307 E= C*VCW/LC1 + QS/2 293.505
310 F = A*VCW+C*W2*VCW/LC1-U 2080.25
320 G = -R -2097.626
330 IF (F^2-4*E*G)<0 THEN 340 ELSE 360
340 PRINT” Value of D is imaginary not possible review given data”
350 STOP
360 H = -F+(F^2-4*E*G)^.5 525.53
370 D1 = H/(2*E) 0.895 Meters
380 J = -F-(F^2-4*E*G)^.5 -4686.03
390 D2 = J/(2*E) 7.98 Meters
400 PRINT” Depth of footing at column one =”;D1;”Meters” 0.895 Meters
410 PRINT “Depth of footing at column two=”;D2;”Meters” 7.98 Meters
540 PRINT” Width of footing in meters=”;B1;”at X distance from outer
face of column”
550
550 X = X2 1.2
560 GOSUB 860
570 AS3 = 10000*U1
580 AS4 = 1000*U2
590 B3 = W
600 PRINT” Area of steel at X2 distance =”;AS3;”CM Sq”
610 PRINT “Area of steel at X2 distance =”;AS4;”CM Sq”
680 PRINT” Width of footing at X2=”;B3;”Meters”
234
690 X = X3
700 GOSUB 860
710 AS5 = 10000*U1
720 AS6 =1000*U2
730 B4 = W
740 PRINT” Area of steel bars at a distance X3=”;AS5;”Cm sq”
750 PRINT” Area at a distance X3=”;AS6;”Cm Sq”
760 PRINT” Width at a distance X3=”;B4;”Meters”
770 X = X4 2.4
780 GOSUB 860
790 AS7 = 10000*U1
800 AS8 = 10000*U2
810 B5 = W
805 PRINT “Area of steel bars at a distance X4=”;AS7;”Cm Sq”
815 PRINT” Area of steel bars at a distance X4=”;AS8;”Cm Sq”
820 PRINT “Width at a distance X4=”;B5;”Meters”
830 STOP
835 REM This is sub routine
840 PRINT” Below is a moment equation between column one and
two”
836 QS1 = -QS/6 17.916
838 QB1 = QB/2 618.5
840 REM Let M1 moment equation between column one and two and
MU as absolute moment
845 PRINT
TAB(1);”M1=’;TAB(5);QS1;”Xcube”;TAB(100);QB1;”Xsquare”;TAB(1
8);P1;”X-W1/2)”
*** Note resulting equation is M1 = -17.9366X3 + 618.5X2 – 3067(X
– 0.23)
850 M1 = QS1*X^3 + QB1*X^2 – P1*(X-W1/2)
870 MU = ABS(M10 916.1
865 W = B-(B-A)/LC1*X 4.05
880 K = FY/(1.7*FC) 11.7619
890 F = -D 0.895
900 H = MU/(0.90*98.07*FY) 0.00246011
910 R = (F^2-4*K*H)^.5 0.8278
920 U1 = (-F+R)/(2*K) 0.0732
930 U2 = (-F-R)/(2*K) 0..002856
940 RETURN
950 STOP
960 REM Design of steel in short direction
970 WL = W1 + 0.75*D 1.13
235
980 WS = B-WL*(B-A)/LC1 3.856

990 BS = (B+WS)/2 4.067
1000 LS = (BS-W1)/2 1.8035
1010 X = LS
1020 GOSUB 1310
1030 ASS1 = 10000*U1 5.13522
CM2/Mtr
1040 ASS2 = 10000*U2 755.79
CM2/Mtr
1050 PRINT “Area of steel in square cm=”;ASS1 5.13522
1060 PRINT” Area of steel in square cm=”;ASS2;”Cm2”
1070 REM Design of steel in short direction at column two
1080 WL2 = W2 + 1.5*D 1.8025
1090 LS2 = (A+WL2*(B-A))/LC1 1.019896
1100 BS2 = (A+LS2)/2 1.539798
1110 LS3 = (BS2 – W2)/2 0.539899
1120 X = LS3 0.539899
1130 GOSUB 1310
1140 AL1 = 10000*U1 1.26807
Cm2/Mtr
1150 AL2 = 10000*U2 759.66
Cm2/Mtr
1160 PRINT” Area of steel in Sq Cm=”AL1;”Per meter width”
1170 PRINT “Area of steel in Sq Cm=”;AL2;”Per meter width”
*** Insert program line no 965
965 INPUT”W1,W2,D”:LC1,W1,W2,D W1 =.46,W2 =
.46,LC1 = 5.94,D
= 0.895
975 INPUT”QS,FC,FY,QU”:QS,FC,FY,QU QS =107.5,FC
=211,
FY=4219,QU =
289.5
1180 REM Determine point of inflectioni.e. bending of bars
1190 A1 = -QS/6 -17.916
1200 GOSUB 1410
1210 LX1 = X
1220 LX2 = XA
1230 LX3 = XB
1240 PRINT” First root is=”;LX1
1250 PRINT” Second root is =”;LX2
1260 PRINT” Third root is =”;LX3
1270 PRINT” Small real positive root represents point of zero moment
(I’e point of inflection”
236
1275 PRINT” Programmed by Bienvenido C. David Civil/Structural

Engineer on the 11th of November year 1984 in his hometown
Baguio City”
1280 PRINT” Designed By Bienvenido C. David A Civil/Structural
Engineer”
1290 END
1300 REM This is a sub routine no two
1310 MU = QU/2*X^2 169.932 KN Mtr
1320 K = FY/(1.7*FC) 11.7619
1330 F = -D 0.895
1340 H = MU/(.90*98.07*Fy) 0.0004563
1350 R = (F^2-4*K*H)^.5 0.88292
1360 U1 = (-F+R)/(2*K) 0.000513522
CM2/Mtr
1370 U2 = (-F-R)/(2*K) 0.075579
1380 RETURN
1390 STOP
1400 REM This is sub routine no three General cubic equation program
1410 B1 = QB/2 618.515
1420 C1 = -P1 3067
1430 D1 = P1*W1/2 705.41
1440 B2 = B1/A1 -34.5217
1450 C2 = C1/A1 171.181
1460 D2 = D1/A1 -39.3717
1470 P3 = C2-B2^2/3 -226.029
1480 Q3 = D2-B2*C2/3+2*B2^3/27 -1116.6
1490 R3 = P3^3/27+Q3^2/4 -115,990
1500 IF R3<0 THEN 1580 YES
1510 Z3 = - Q3/2+R3^.5
1520 IF Z3<0 THEN 1550 YES
1530 ZA = Z3^0.3333
1540 GOTO 1660
1550 ZB = ABS(Z3)^0.33333 8.23422
1560 ZA = -ZB -823422
1570 GOTO 1660
1580 O = ATN(ABS(R3)^.5/(-Q3/2))/3 0.203339
1590 PI = 2.094395102
1600 ZC = ((-Q3/2)^2-R3)^.5 653.979
1610 ZA = ZC^0.3333 8.6800
1520 IF (-Q3/2)>0 THEN 1650
1630 ZA = -ZA
1640 XA = COS(O+2*PI)*(ZA-P3/(3*ZA))-B2/3 7.602
237
1650 X = COS(O+PI)*(ZA-P3/(3*ZA))-B2/3
1660 XB = COS(O)* (ZA-P3/(3*ZA))-B2/3
1670 RETURN
1680 END
DETERMINATION OF STEEL REINFORCEMENT AREAS AT DIFFERENT LOCATIONS
Same program listing on page 225
Let us begin with line no 140
140 DATA Note example only 0.6, 1.2, 1.8, 2.4, 2.8, 3.0, 3.6, 4.84, 5.94
150 M (Q) = A*X (Q) ^3 + B*X (Q) ^2 + C*X (Q) + D
160 V (Q) = E*X (Q) ^2 + F*X (Q) + G
170 W (Q) = H – (H – J)/LC*X (Q)
180 D1 (Q) = V (Q)/ (W (Q)*VC
190 M1 (Q) = ABS (M (Q))
195 MU (Q) = M1 (Q)/W (Q)
200 R = FY/ (1.7*FC)
205 P = -88.263*FY*R
210 N = 88.263*FY
215 Z (Q) = MU (Q)/P
220 K (Q) = N*D1 (Q)/P
225 I (Q) = Z (Q) + 0.25*K (Q) ^2
230 AS1 (Q) = Z (Q) ^.5 - .5*K (Q)
240 AS2 (Q) = Z (Q) ^.5 + .5*K (Q)
250 PRINT AS2 (Q)
260 NEXT Q
238
270 PRINT M(1);M(2);M(3);M(4);M(5);M(6);M(7);M(8);M(9);M(10)
275 PRINT V(1);V(2);V(3);V(4);V(5);V(6);V(7);V(8);V(9);V(10)
280 PRINT W(1);W(2);W(3);W(4);W(5);W(6);W(7);W(8);W(9);W(10)
The following program is how the program no 2 “Code name Newton can be used to locate
the point of inflection (bending of steel reinforcements “We start at line no: 285)”
The program is a cross check for program no 1 “General cubic equation”
PRINT “Locate point of inflection. Let us use “Newton’s method of approximation “
290 PRINT” This is Newton’s method of approximation to solve for the real positive root”
295 PRINT” Try a value of X as first trial root X = LC/2 say 2.97 or 3
300 PRINT “If all coefficients are known then run line no 310”
305 STOP
310 CALL CLEAR
360 INPUT”Coeffecients of A, B, C, D”: A, B, C, D A = -17.936, B = 618.5, C = -3067, D =

705.41
370 INPUT “How many trials T: T
380 INPUT ‘Value of X as first trial”: X 3:00
390 P = 1
410 PRINT “Assume trial root is=”; X
420 REM Format is AX3 + BX2 + CX + D
430 Y = A*X^3 + B*X^2 + C*X + D
440 IF Y = 0 THEN 450 ELSE 470

239
450 PRINT” Real root is=”; X
460 STOP
470 T = T-1
480 IF T= 0 THEN 490 ELSE 500
490 STOP
500 R = X
510 GOSUB 580
520 X = S
530 P = P+1
540 PRINT”I am now performing trial no=”; P
550 PRINT “Trial root is=”; X
560 GOTO 430
570 STOP
590 M = A*R^3 + B*R^2 + C*R + D
600 N = 3*A*R^2 + 2*B*R + C
610 S = R-(M/N)
620 RETURN
630 END
240
This chapter is about Designing a Cantilever Retaining Wall. The author discusses in
details the forces acting on retaining walls. The different criteria in retaining wall design.
An illustrative example explains in detail step by step the procedure in designing a Cantilever
retaining Wall. The author explains how the two MATHEMATICAL PROGRAMS (Struct
math Solver 1 and Structmath Solver 2) were used by the author as a sub
routine program within a main program.
Retaining wall is a wall whose purpose is to resist the trust of a bank of earth or other
materials. Sometimes this is unanimous to a concrete dam. There are three types of
Retaining walls. The gravity, the Cantilever and Counter forth retaining wall. In a
241
similar manner if the wall is used to confined a water as in spillway in dam construction
it may be called intermediate Training Wall (ITW) or Right Training Wall (RTW).
a) Gravity retaining walls depends mostly upon their own weight for stability usually low in
height. They are expensive because of their inefficient use of materials.
b) Cantilever retaining wall is a reinforced concrete wall that utilizes the weight of the
soil itself to provide the desired weight. Stem, toe and heel are each designed as
cantilever slab.
c) Counter forth retaining wall is similar to a cantilever retaining wall, except that it
is used where the cantilever is too long or for very high pressures behind the wall and has
counterforths which tie the wall together.
In this chapter I have included a classical solution (ANALYTICAL METHOD) as well to

illustrate clearly how the classical solution is cast into the digital solution. Program no. 21 is
all about “Design of Cantilever Retaining Wall”
242
DESIGN, ANALYSIS AND FORMULA DERIVATIONS FOR COMPUTER
APPLICATIONS
Design and analysis of cantilever retaining wall is quite complicated because it combines the
science of soil mechanics, hydraulics and structural mechanics. In ancient times, this is usually
done by trial and error method. However in the beginning of the 20 th century with the
acceptance of Foundation Engineering, scientific discipline plays an important role in the
analysis of retaining wall and lately with the emergence of the micro computers and the
matrix method of structural analysis accurate design of retaining walls have improved to
a mark degree.
Below is a typical section of a Cantilever retaining wall and the forces acting on it.
243
Fr = Rtan + c’B + Pp Active Soil Pressure Pah
F = Fr (1.5) h
Tb Slab thickness
Pp =1/2(y) (Hp)2(Kp)
There are three criteria for retaining wall design

1) Sliding stability
2) Overturning stability
3) Uplift stability
By sliding stability, we mean the entire structure must be in equilibrium (i.e. the
summation of forces horizontal is equals to zero. Then by definition F sliding =
The safety factor against sliding should be at least 1.5 for cohessionless backfill and
about 2 for cohesive backfill.
244
Overturning stability means that the structure must be safe against overturning with respect
to the toe. Then by definition Foverturning = The
usual safety of factor against overturning with respect to toe is 1.5 for cohessionless
backfill and 2 suggested for cohesive soil.
Uplift stability means, there should be no negative pressures at either toe or heel usually
known as the principle of the middle third which will be defined later.
The pressure acting on the stem of a retaining wall is analogous to a concrete dam except that
a factor Ka is introduced. Ka is usually known as Rankin’s coefficient of active soil pressure
which will be discussed later. Let us analyze the figure below.
Stem portion M= (W1)(h)3
h dy
SECTION PRESSURE DIAGRAM MOMENT DIAGRAM
Figure 20.2
Let y = Distance from top of wall
Let w1 = Weight of active soil in pounds per cubic Foot
Let LF = Load factor used (This is similar to 1.4 and 1.7 used in beams design)
Let H = Height of retaining wall

245
Then from the pressure diagram it is evident that the pressure at any instant is
p = Ka(LF)(w1) in Kips . The total pressure then at any point from top of wall is
equals to the sum ∑ of all infinisitimal elements summation areas pdy. The total pressure
then would
P = Ka(LF)(w1) dy = (Ka)(w1)y2 = = (Ka)(w1)h2 Equation (1)
In a similar manner, the moment acting at any point is equals to M = P(Y)(dy) substituting the
values of P from Equation (1) we get DM = (Ka)(w1)y2dy the total moment

2
then by integration M = (Ka)(w1) dy = Ka (w1)(y)3 but
Y = h so that M = = Ka (w1)(h)3 In inch Kips
From figure 20.2 the driving forces causing horizontal sliding will be the horizontal component
Pah while the resisting horizontal force will be the frictional force FR which is equals to FR =
R tan + c’B + Pp here is equivalent to the base soil factor in degrees. B is the overall
base length and Pp is the passive soil pressure preventing sliding of structure here Kp is known
as the Rankin coefficient of passive pressure.
The overturning moment can be found by taking moments about the heel. It is best to divide
the section into individual elements for easy computation shown in figure 20.1. The forces
causing overturning moment will be the horizontal component of P = Pah acting at a lever arm
equals to 1/3(h) from top of wall.
Now we defined Ka known as the Rankin’s coefficient of active earth pressure which is equals
to Ka = It may also be expressed by Trigonometric transformation K a = tan2 (45 -
Ka can also be computed in terms of B and here B is the angle of inclination, soil surface
with respect to the top of wall and
246
Ka (COSB)(COSB - COS2B - COS2
COSB + COS2B - COS2
with Ka known then Pah is equals to (Ka)(w1)(LF)(h)3 in Kips Equation (4)
Equation 4 is known as the active soil pressure, it is called active because it causes the
structure to slide and overturn. In a similar manner, the coefficients Kp known as the passive
Kp = (COSB) (COSB + COS2B - COS2 with Kp evaluated
COSB - COS2B - COS2
Pp is equals to Pp = (Kp)(w)(h2) here h is the reckoned depth of soil from top cover of
concrete. The thickness of stem is usually governed by shear at the junction.
The thickness of stem is usually obtained by shear. The shear force of concrete is equals to
Vc = vc(b)(d) equating this to the shear at junction. A linear equation in t is solved. A covering
of 2” is added as covering of steel..
By uplift stability, this means there is no negative pressure at toe or heel. The principle of the
middle third will be applied . For a rectangular pressure diagram as shown below in Figure A
20.2 the resultant is located at the center which is equals to B/2. . For a triangular pressure
diagram as shown in figure B 20.2, the resultant is located at a distance B/3 from hill. It is
evident that for rectangular pressure distribution the pressure at any point is equal and
uniform thru out while in the second case a maximum pressure occurs at the heel and a zero
pressure at the toe.
The third case, if the resultant lies between B/2 and B/3 from heel then a trapezoidal
pressure diagram shown in figure C 20.2. However if the resultant is located at a distance less
than B/3 from heel or less than B/3 from toe, then the resulting pressure diagram would be
shown in Figure D 20.2.
247
To satisfy uplift stability, it is therefore necessary that the resultant of all forces must be
located between the distance B/3 to B/2. If we let the symbol as the location of R from
the heel edge, then taking moments about the heel edge
R( ) = Summation Mr - (Pah)(h/3) from which is readily solved.
here R = Weight of the section plus the vertical component of Pa Introducing the letter e as
eccentricity reckoned from resultant pressure diagram then is equals to e= - then
for a value of e for positive pressure at either toe or heel
e must be within the range = - = In short the eccentricity must not be less than
or equals to L/6 FIGURE 20.2
FIGURE A FIGURE B FIGURE C FIGURE D
R R R R
B/2 B/3 B/6 B/6
B B B B
with e solved the pressure acting at the heel and toe can be solved by combined axial and
flexure formula from which Qheel = (1 + ) and Toe = (1 - ) here V is the
summation of vertical loads and B is the overall length of base. Like the footing the bearing
capacity can be obtained from soil test, building codes. It can also be computed by the
empirical formula qultimate = CNcdcIc + qNqdqiq + BNydyIy this formula is known as

Bousinique equation.
248
Once the stability of section is confirmed the next move is to determine the required
area of steel reinforcements in base and at the stem. The analysis is similar to that in
footing, however in the stem portion since width varies linearly with h it is necessary to
determine the required area of steel reinforcements at different locations, often the minimum
steel reinforcement ratio from code governs. Sometimes it is customary to find where the
cutting point of steel reinforcements for a given moment, this is usually the case where a
supply of steel bars is limited. Shown below is a graphical representation both for Pn(limit)
and given area of steel bars.
INTERACTION DIAGRAM CUTTING POINTS OF STEEL REINFORCEMENTS
SECTION CUTTING POINTS Y MINIMUM VALUE OF Y
Y1 PROG LINES 2240 - 2820
A1Y3 + B1Y2 + C1Y + D = 0 M = A1X3 + C1X + D1X
Y2
Y
PROG LINES 1610 - 2830
Y3
Mmax Mmax
B equation of straight line M = AS (.90)(FY)(d - )
given As three values
From the figure the point of intersection Y is the distance by which minimum steel
reinforcement ratio from code governs. We note that the “General Cubic Equation” is used
two times. The above discussion can be visualized by a detailed classical solution (Analytical
solution).
249
In our general computer program, if either of the three criteria is not satisfied the computer
displays into the monitor screen the word “Revise dimensions or material strength
specifications failure of retaining wall by sliding or overturning, uplift stability eminent”.
Computer stops running and the designer may revise his dimensions.
We note that in locating the cutting point of steel reinforcement bars, the third degree
equation is encountered twice, so the general cubic equation program no 1 (Struct
math solver 1) is included as a sub routine program within the main program
“Ret Wall program no. 21”. Instead using a one dimension array author prefers
the combination of RESTORE and GOSUB statement. (See program listings).
ANALYTICAL SOLUTION
Design a Cantilever Retaining Wall for the condition shown. Use Rankin Ka even though
wall is high. B = 10
Backfill soil = 34
X y = 115 P.C.F no water
1Ft height of wall = 26 Ft
h’
Fc’ = 3 K.S.I Fy = 60 K.S.I.
5 Ft. Batter on front face of wall = 1:48
3 Ft. 9.5 Ft.
top thickness = 16” Load factor is taken as 1.8 Weight of concrete is 150 Pounds per Cubic
Foot. Estimate 3.5” from CGS to soil interface to allow approximately 3” covering of clear cover.
Base soil = 32 and c = 0.40

250
1) Step one Establish stem dimensions
Compute Rankin’s active earth coefficients Ka = (CosB) [CosB – Cos2B – Cos2 ]/ [CosB + Cos2B –
Cos2 ] = COS 10 (COS 10 (COS 10 )2 – (COS 34 )2)/ (COS 10 + (COS 10 )2 – (COS 34 )2)
= .294 Find pressure acting on wall (the horizontal component of pressure. Let that Pressure be
Pa = ((y)(h)2(y) here y is the unit backfill weight of soil in pounds per cubic foot or .115
Kips. per Cubic Foot. Substituting values we get Pa = (0.115) (26)2 (0.294) = 11.43
Kips/Foot *** A strip of 1 foot is considered.
Pa- horizontal = Pa (COS B) = 11.43(COS 10 = 11.25 Kips per Foot from code wide beam shear is
given as vc= 2 fc’ = 2(0.85) (3000) = 0.09311 in K.S.I. WITH A LOAD FACTOR OF 1.8
Pa- horizontal = 1.8(11.25) The shear carried by concrete at junction is Vc = (vc) (t)
(12) equating Vc to Pa- horizontal we get Pah = Vc 0.09311(12) (t) = 1.8(11.25)
solving for t = = 18.14” Allow covering of 3.5” then T at junction is 18.14” + 3.5”
= 21.6” with a slope batter of 1/4” per foot then thickness at top of wall is t = t junction – h (0.25)
= 21. 6 – 26(0.25) Ttop = 15.1 Inches use t = 16” to maintain even dimensions let us use t =
16 inches + 26((0.25) = 22.5” use 23”
Step 2 Compute overturning and sliding stability of wall
From figure it is evident that H’ = H + 2.42 + 9.5(Tan 10 ) = 30.1 Feet

Pah’ = 1/2(y)(H’)2(Ka) = 0.50(30.1)2(0.115)(0.294) – 15.1
From these data’s and wall dimensions we can set up the following in table form
PART Weight, Kips Arm, Foot Mr’ ft -

kips
1 0.5(26+27.65) x 0.115(9.5) = 29.3 9.67 283.3
2 1.33 x 26 x 0.15 x 1 =5.2 4.28 22.1
3 0.5 x 0.59 x 26 x 0.15 = 1.2 3.39 4.0
4 2.42 x 14.42 x 0.15 x 1 = 5.2 7.21 37.5
Pav’ = Pah’(sin10 ) = 15.1 sin 10 = 2.6 Kips 14.42 37.5
/Foot
251
Total Sum Sum weight = 43.15
Sum 384.4 Foot

Overturning Kips
M=
Taking moments at toe the overturning moment is MO
mo = P’AH = 151 Ft Kips/foot here = 1/3 x h = = 151 Ft kips/foot
The safety factor is sum = = 2.54 greater than 1.5 Okay. Here 1.5 is the
recommended factor of safety against overturning which is equals to 1.5
Determine sliding stability of wall. The factor of safety against sliding will be based on using
3 feet of depth of soil at the toe.
Kp = tan2(45 + ) = 3.255 The friction coefficient factor Fr = R tan ’ + cB’ + Pp here

the limiting value of c’ is 0.50c to 0.75c here c = 0.40 given see datas problem with R = 43.5
substituting values we get Fr = 43.5 tan 32 + 0.67(0.4)(14.42) = 31 Kips From Bowles
2
reference text book page 438 “Foundation Analysis and Design ” Pp = 1/2YH Kp + 2cHKp
see drawing here H is the depth of soil from surface of toe up to soil surface with Kp = 3.255 &
1.804 respectively substituting values in the above equation we get
Pp = 0.50(0.112)(3)2(3.25) + 2(0.4)(3)(1.804) = 6 kips
Summation SFr = Pp + Fr = 31 + 6 = 37 Kips The resulting F = = 37/15.1 = 2.45

greater than 1.5 (i.e recommended o kay)
Now locate resultant = Summation weight on base and the eccentricity. Taking moments at
toe we have = = = 5.37 ‘ Compute eccentricity e
e = B/2 - 14.42/2 – 5.37 = 1.84 Feet less than L/6 recommended for eccentricity okay.
252
Step 3 Compute bearing capacity of soil. For datas see page 134 reference textbook
“Foundation Analysis and Design by Joseph Bowles”. The actual soil bearing pressure using
bousiniques equation is qultimate = cNcdcic + qNqdqiq + YBNydyiy B’ = 14.42 – 2(1.84) =
10.7 From tables Nc =35.5, Nq = 23.2 , Ny = 20.8, Ic = 0.42 , Iq = 0.44, Iy = 0.309. dc= 1.19, dq
=1.13 and dy= 1.00 substituting values in the above equation we have
qult = 0.4(35.5)(0.42)1.19 + 5(0.112)(23.2)(1.13)(0.44) + 0.5(0.112)(1.0)(10.7)(20.8)(0.309) =

7.1 - 6.5 - + 3.9 = 17.5 qa = 17.5/3 = 5.8 Ksf
Compute actual soil pressure. Actual soil pressure is given as q = (1 )
= (1 = 3.02 (1 ) = 5.3 ksf maximum at toe q = 0.7 ksf

max at heel.
Step 4 Compute base slab shear and bending moments toe and heel.
For toe at stem face x = 3 feet. slope pressure is q = 5.3 – 0.36 – 0..32X. Neglecting
soil over toe and integrating the pressure diagram we get the shear at any section
V = 4.94X – 0.32X2/2 = 13.4 Kips Integrating the shear diagram we have the moment at any
2
section M = 4.94 dx - .32/2 dx = 4.94/2X2 – 0.32/6X3 = 20.8 Foot
kips
For heel at approximately CG of tension steel X = 9.5 + = 9.79 Feet for moment , use 9.5
feet for shear.
Use average height of soil on heel for downward pressure includes Pav = 2.6 kips, the
pressure q is = 3.45 - .70 -.32X. The shear at any section X is V = 2.75X – X2 +

PavX
Mheel = 107.2 Foot kips

253
Step 5. Check base slab shear using largest V, with LF = 1.8 and d = 2.417 – 0.29 = 2.13 feet
Actual shear stress V = = = 0.84 less than 0.093 okay *** Note
we could reduce the base slab shear stress by about 1 to 1.5”
Step 6 Compute steel reinforcement ratio, using authors derived
formula ***see chapter three P= (1 ± 1 – 2.622Mu/(bd2Fc’) )

with Mu = 107.2(12)(1.8) = 2315.52 Inch Kips and b = 12” ( 1 foot strip length) and
d = 25.5 inches evaluating the terms separately 2.622 x 2315.52/(12(25.5)2(3) ) =
0.2582691 and
0.847fc’/fy = = 0.042235 Substituting values and taking the smaller

negative sign we get p = 0.042235 x (1 – 0.861237) = 0.042235(0.138763) =
0.0058606
but from code minimum is p = 200’/fy = 200/60000 = 0.0033 hence actual steel
reinforcement ratio governs use p = 0.00586 Then area of steel Asheel = p(b)(d) =
0.00586(12)(25.5) = 1.79 in2/ft
For steel reinforcement in toe, let us use authors derived formula ***
Refer to chapter 4
As = (b)(d) ± (0.7225Fc’2b2d2)/Fy2 – 1.888Fc’(b)(Mu)/Fy2))
with Mu = 20.8 Using a load factor of 1.8 Mutoe = 20.8(12)(1.8) = 449.28 Inch kips with d =
25.5” and b = 12” substituting values and evaluating the mathematical expressions one by
one. .7225fc’b2d2/fy2 = 0.7225(3)2(12)2(25.5)2/(60)2 = 169.1300
254
0.85fc’bd/fy = = 13.005
1.88888fc’bMu/fy2 = =
8.48636
Substituting numerical values in the above equation we get
13.05 13.05 = 13.05

12.674 taking the least value we further get As = 13.005 - 12.674 = o.331 in2/ft.
Check actual steel reinforcement from code allowable
p = As/bd = = 0.0018 less than P minimum from code Therefore p

minimum from code governs = 0.0033
Required area of steel at toe = Astoe = minimum (b)(d) = 0.0033(12)(25.5) = 1.02 in2/feet
***Note author by computer use the mathematical expression below *** See
chapter 4
–
As = Mu/( fy(d – a/2)) to solve areas of steel reinforcements as sub routines

program within the main program both heel and stem portions (See program listings)
Below is the load, shear and moment diagram

255
3 Ft 9.5 Ft
q = 2.429.15) = 0.36 STEM Q = 2.42(1.5)+26.8(.115) = 3.45 KSF
pressure diagram heel and toe o.7 k.s.f.
5.3 k.s.f. 1 .32
TOP OF WALL TOP OF WALL TOP OF WALL 16”
Z 1.4 Ft kips .2h 17.4”
22 Ft kips .5h 19.5”
.8h h 21.6”
90 Ft kips h 23”
175.5 Ft kips d = 19.5”
Pressure diagram Moment diagram Section
STEM PORTION
From the pressure diagram profile the pressure at any point is q = ka(w)(z)/1000 in Kips. The
total pressure then is found by integrating the pressure diagram dv =qdz and V =
V = Ka(w)/1000 dz from which V = Ka(w)(z)2/2000 Likewise integrating the

shear diagram . The moment at any section is M = vdz = Ka(w)/2000 2dz
M= (z)3 Applying a load factor of 1.8 and w = 115 Pounds per cubic foot
the moment then at any section is M = 0.010143Z3 from the figure the section at
any height h is d = 0.26923(h) + 12.5
256
Step 7 Compute steel reinforcements stem portions from the above figure at
section 0.5h, 0.8h and h using a load factor of 1.8
Using authors derived formula we get the following information’s in table form.
Point M,ft. Kips Wall thickness D inches As Square P(used)

inches Inch
0.5h 22.00 19.5 16 0.64 0.003
0.8h 90 21.6 18.1 1.18 0.005
H 175.8 23.0 19.5 2.26 0.010
For longitudinal shrinkage and temperature steel Use (12)(0.002) =

0.43 in2/Ft. in top half
Use 2 no 5 bars at one on each face = Use (19.5 + 23)/2(12)(0.002)=

051in2
*** Note author by computer use the General Cubic equation

program to solve the cutting points of steel reinforcements stem
portions. (See program listings)
257
SECTION DETAILS

19, 1970 PRC NO: 10170
DESCRIPTION: Cantilever Retaining Wall Design By U.S.D. format

Code)
TITLE: Design Of Cantilever retaining Wall
258
CODE NAME: Ret - Wall
MACHINE LANGUAGE : IBM BASIC COMPUTER: IBM PERSONAL

Program steps: 310
LIBRARY MODULE: Floppy Disk PROGRAM NAME: RET - WALL
DRAWING FIGURE
REFERENCE TEXTBOOKS: Foundation Design By Soil Mechanics In

Foundation Analysis & Gregory Chebotariof Engineering Practice By
Design By Joseph Bowles Charles B. Peck
interpreted.
259
RET WALL.Is a program that sizes and designs the stem, heel and toe of a cantilever retaining
wall by using the Ultimate Strength Design theory. The program determines the stability of
the section i.e. sliding, overturning and uplift pressure at heel and toe. Determines the
required areas of steel reinforcements at base slab, heel and toe. Prints on the monitor
screen required equation locate cutting points of steel with given area of steel
reinforcements and vice versa. The program is written in advance basica language and can be
feed to a wide variety of programmable calculators, personal computers. Can be easily
incorporated to the E. REVIEW CENTRE OF UC – BCF.

If true branch out

Main program
If false
LINE STATEMENT SAMPLE ONLY FOR

NO DE-BUGGING
PURPOSES
10 CALL CLEAR
15 PRINT” THIS IS COMPUTER PROGRAM NO 21
“Design of Cantilever Retaining Wall by U.S.D
method” in English units
260
20 PRINT” This program was developed by

Bienvenido C. David, a Civil/Structural Engineer
on May 1, 1984 in Baguio City”
25 PRINT “ For drawing and legend refer to
program record see attached sheets”
30 PRINT” All units i.e. material strength
specifications in Kips per square inch, Height of
retaining wall in feet, Linear dimensions of heel
and toe i.e length in feet, thickness of stem in
inches at top”
35 PRINT “Length of base from toe up to stem in
feet, length of base from heel up to back face
of stem in feet, weight of backfill soil in pounds
per cubic foot, weight of base soil in pounds per
cubic foot”
40 PRINT” Coefficients of base soil factor in
degrees passive soil pressure, slope batter front
face of wall in decimal i.e X:Y where X is run
and Y is rise”
45 PRINT” Angle of inclination of backfill soil from
top of wall in degrees, coefficient factor of base
soil in degrees, passive soil pressure in degrees”
50 PRINT “Weight of concrete is taken as 150
pounds per cubic foot, refer to tables by Joseph
E. Bowles for determining soil bearing pressure
at base i.e. Nc,Ny,Ic,Iq, Iy,Dc,Dq, & Dy as input
statement”
55 PRINT” For Shear and moment use 0.90 for
moment and 0.85 for shear”
60 PRINT” If all data’s are in their respective units
then run line no 80”
70 STOP
80 REM Step one Compute dimension and wall
stability
85 INPUT”H,W1,W2,B1,H1,B2,B3” Example only H = 26
H,W1,W2,B1,H1,B2,B3 feet, W1 = 115
Lbs,W2 = 112 Lbs, B1
261
= 10 ,H1 = 5 Ft, B2 =
34 and B3 = 32
90 INPUT”FY,LF,SB,C,TS”:FY,LF,SB.C,TS FY = 60,LF =1.8,SB
=0.25, C= 0.40 & TS =
2.417
440 WD = 150/1000*TS*L4 5.18537 Kips
450 XD = L4/2 7.1525
460 MD = WD*XD 37. 088358 in foot
kips
470 WT = WA + WB + WC + WD 40.46162 kips
480 MT = MA + MB + MC + MD 342.517 foot kips
495 REM Compute overturning moment take
moment at toe
500 H4 = H3 + TS 30. 092 Feet
510 P2H = 0.50*W1/1000*H4^2*COS(K3)*K4 15.075
515 P2V = 0.5*W1/1000*H4^2*KA*SIN(K3) 2.661589
520 MAH = P2H*H4//3 151.212
530 FM = MT/MAH 2.265
540 IF FM<1.5 THEN 560
550 IF FM>=1.5 THEN 580
560 PRINT” Assumed dimension of slab not
okay failure will be initiated by
overturning of structure either revise
dimension L1, L2 or thickness of slab or
material strength specifications”
570 STOP
580 REM Determine sliding stability of wall
585 PRINT” Overturning stability of wall okay”
590 KB = COS(K3)*(COS(K3) + K1)/(COS(K3)- 3.2946
K1)
600 KP1 = KB^.5 1.8151076
610 REM Take C as 0.625 Average value
615 K5 = 0.0174533*B3 .5585150
262
620 FR = WT*TAN(K5) + 0.625*C*L4 28.8588

630 REM Let PP passive force supporting slab
640 PP = 0.5*W2*KB*(H1-TS)^2/1000 + 4.981696
2*C*(H1-TS)*KP1
650 SFH = PP + FR 33.85692
660 REM P2H = Force causing horizontal
motion
670 REM Let FU actual factor of safety for
sliding must not exceed 1.5 as per code
requirement.
680 FU = SFH/P2H 2.2448
700 IF FU<1.5 THEN 720
710 IF FU>=1.5 THEN 740 720
720 PRINT “Failure of retaining wall by sliding
revise either dimension of slab L1,L2,TS or
material strength specification”
*** REM Have to start at this point line no
95
95 INPUT”Nc,Nq,Ny,Ic,Iq,Dc,Dq,Dy”: Nc = 35.5, Nq =
Nc,Nq,Ny,Ic,Iq,Dc,Dq,Dy 23.2, Ny = 20.8, Ic
=0.42, Iq = 0.44,
Dc = 1.19, Dq =
1.13,Dy = 1.00, Iy
= 0.30796
100 INPUT”L1,L2”:l1,L2 9.5,3
105 K3 = B1*3.141516/180
120 K3 = 0.0174533*B1
130 K4 = 0.0174533*B2 .5585056.0593
135 IF (COS(K3)^2 – COS(K4)^2<0 THEN 137
ELSE 138
138 STOP
230 KA = COS(K3)*(COS(K3)–K1)/(COS(K3)+K1) 0.2943727
263
240 PA = 0.5*W1*H^2*KA/1000 11.42778

250 PAH = PA*COS(K30 11.254169
260 VC = 0.0537587*FC^.5 0.09311
270 T1 = PAH*LF/(12*VC)+3.5 21.63
280 T2 = T1-H*SB 15.13
290 REM Compute overturning and sliding
stability of wall
300 HO = L1*TAN(K3) 1.675
310 H3 = HO+H 27.675106
320 WA = 0.5*(H+H3)*L1/1000*W1 29.31 Kips
330 AT =L1*H+0.5*L1*HO 254.956
340 X1 = (H*L1*L1/2+0.5*L1*H0*2/3*L1)AT 4.7994
350 XA =X1+L2+T1/12 9.6019
360 MA = WA*XA 281.4316
370 WB = T2/12*H*150/1000 4.924685
380 XB = T2/24+L2+SB*H/12 4.17 Feet
390 MB =WB*XB 20.477 Feet
400 WC = 0.5*(T1-T2)*150*H/12000 1.05625 Inch Kips
410 XC = 0.6667*(T1-T2)/12+L2 3.361129
420 MC = WC*XC 3.5501926
430 L4 = L1+L2+T1/12 14.3025
440 REM Our next line number would be 730
730 STOP
740 PRINT” Sliding stability of retaining wall
section okay no revision necessary”
745 REM Checked uplift pressure at toe or
base
750 X2 = (MT-MAH)/WT 4.728 Feet
760 E1 = XD-X2 2.4245 Feet
770 E2 = L4/6 2.38375 Feet
780 IF E1>E2 THEN 800
790 IF E1<E2 THEN 820
264
800 PRINT” Assumed dimensions not okay for

eccentricity uplift pressure at base or heel
eminent either revise section or material
strength specifications”
810 STOP
820 PRINT “Section okay for eccentricity
resultant lies within the middle third no
revision necessary”
830 REM Compute bearing capacity of soil at
base
835 L5 = L4-2*E1 9.4535
840 REM Let Q1 Actual soil pressure at base
860 Q1 = H1*W2/1000 .56 Kips per
square foot
870 REM Let Qu Ultimate soil pressure and Qa
= Ultimate soil pressure for cohessionless
base soil
880 QU 16.94716
=C*NC*DC*IC+Q1*NQ*DQ*IQ+0.5*W2*L5
*NY*DY*IY/1000
885 REM Note values of the above variables
can be found from the textbook
“Foundation Analysis and Design by
Joseph H Bowles”
890 QA = QU/3 5.6490
900 REM Let QT and QH actual pressure at
heel and toe respectively
910 QT = WT/L4*(1+6*E1/L4) 5.70634
915 PRINT “Actual soil pressure at toe is 5.70634
=”;QT;”Kips Sq Ft”
920 QH = WT/L4*(1-6*E1/L4) -0.0483613
925 PRINT” Actual soil pressure at heel is -0.0483613
265
=”;QH;”KSF”
930 REM Compute base slab shear and
bending moments for toe up to stem face
determine shear and moment equation
by integration if time permits draw shear
and moment diagram by hand
940 PRINT” Sketch and detail retaining wall
section copy values of
QT,QH,L4,L1,W1,L2,P2V,H4,TS,LF,T1,T2,
FC and FY FOR INPUT STATEMENTS
STARTING PROGRAM LINE NO STARTING
1020 for design of steel reinforcements
slab portions and stem
945 PRINT” If finished then type continue to
resume running press enter to run”
950 REM FIRST COMPUTE THICKNESS d STEP Example only QT =
ONE 5.3,QH
=.7,L4=14.42,L1=9.
5,L2 = 3,P2V
=2.6,H =26,H4 =
30.07,FC=3 &
FY=60,LF=1.8,TS=2
.42,KA=0.294,T1=2
3”,T2=16”
1020 INPUT”QT,QH,TS,L4,L1”QT,QH,TS,L4,L1,L2
1030 INPUT”FC,FY,H,H4,P2V”:FC,FY,H,H4,P2V
1040 INPUT”W1,LF”:W1,LF 115,1.8
1050 QS = (QT-QH)/L4 0.3190013
1070 V =(QT-150/1000*TS)*L2*QS/2*L2^2 21.26
1080 VT = ABS(V) 21.26
1090 D = (TS-3.5/12)*12 25.54
1100 VA = VT/(12*D) 0.04364
266
1110 VC = 0.053758*FC^.5 0.0931088

1120 IF VA>VC THEN 1140
1130 IF VA<=VC THEN 1160
1140 PRINT “Actual shear stress exceeds
allowable from code revise D”
1150 STOP
1160 M1 = (QT-150/1000*TS)*L2^2/2- 20.781
QS/6*L2^3
1170 MT = ABS(M1) 20.781
1180 M = MT
1190 GOSUB 1310
1200 AT= AST
1205 PRINT” Area of steel at toe=”;AT;”Square 1.02 Square Inch
Inches Per Foot of width”
1220 X= L1+3.5/12 9.79 Feet
1225 QR = 150/1000*TS+(H+H4)/2*W1/1000 3.5874
1230 M2 = (QR-QH)/2*X^2-1/6*QS*X^3+P2V*X 113
1240 MH = ABS(M2) 25.454
1250 M-MH
1260 GOSUB 1310
1270 AH =AST
1275 PRINT”Recquired area of steel
reinforcements at heel=”;AH;”Square Inch
per foot”
1280 STOP
1290 REM A sub routine required area of steel
at slab toe and hill
1295 REM This is a sub routine determination
of steel reinforcements at slabs toe and
heel
1297 REM This is sub routine one
1300 IF (D^2-2.61**M*LF*12/(FC*12))<0 THEN
267
1305 ELSE 1315

1305 PRINT “Depth of stress rectangular block a
is imaginary not possible review given
data”
1310 STOP
1315 A = D – SQR(D^2-2.61*M*LF*12/(12*FC))
1320 AS = M*LF*12/(0.90*FY*(D-A/2))
1330 P =AS/(12*D)
1340 PN = 0.2/FY
1350 IF P>PN THEN 1370
1360 IF P>=PN THEN 1390
1370 AS1=AS
1380 GOTO 1400
1390 AS1=12*PN*D
1400 AST=AS1
1410 RETURN `
1420 STOP
**** Note For stem portion there are
three alternatives. First determine the
cutting point by which minimum steel
reinforcement ratio from code governs
then as a guide we can find the area of
steel reinforcements for a value of Y
distance from top of wall. Third for a
given area of steel reinforcements
determines the point of cutting at what
distance from top of wall should a portion
of steel reinforcements be cut. A general
cubic equation results, a third degree
equation.
1430 PRINT “This is a continuation of cantilever
retaining wall design finding the cutting
268
points by which minimum steel

reinforcements from code governs”
1435 PRINT” With dimensions already
computed input this numerical values
following program lines”
1440 INPUT”TB,TT,H”:TB,TT,H 23”,16”,26’
1450 INPUT”FC:FY”:FC,FY 3,60 IN k.s.i
1460 INPUT”KA,W1,LF,”:KA,W1,LF 0.294, 115,1.8
1470 DT =TT-3.5 12.5”
1480 DC =DB-DT 7”
1475 DB =TB-3.5 19.5”
1490 PN=0.2/FY 0.0033333
1500 U =PN*FY*/(1.78*FC) 0.039215
1510 V =DC/H 0.2692
1520 J = 10.8*FY*PN 2.159784
1530 MU=1/500*KA*W1*LF 0.121716 Inch Kips
1540 A1 =MU/J
1550 B1 = -(V^2-U*V^2) -0.069626
1560 C1 = 2*U*DT**V 0.2639169
1570 D1 = -(DT^2+2*V*DT) -162.98
1575 REM A1,B1,C1 and D1 are coefficients of
the General Cubic Equation AY13 + B1Y2 +
C1Y + D1 = 0 To solve for Y we restore
general cubic equation program no 1
1580 PRINT” TAB(1);A1;”Y CUBE”;TAB(10);B1;”
Y Square”;TAB(15);C1;”Y”;TAB(22);”=0”
***Note computer prints on the monitor
screen the third degree equation AY13 +
B1Y2 + C1Y + D1 = 0
1590 PRINT “Copy coefficients of Y cube, Y
square and y and constant D1 for data
statement then type continue to resume
269
running”
1600 BREAK
1610 DATA Put value of A1,B1,C1 & D1
1620 GOSUB 2400
1630 PRINT “Location of minimum steel
reinforcements is valid at a distance
Y=”;”Feet from top of wall”1640
1640 REM To find required area of steel
reinforcements for a given value of y
1645 INPUT “Thickness of top T1,T2,:T1,T2 23”,16”
1650 REM Let the factor FR1,FR2,,FR3,,FR4 as
multiplication factor of H
1655 INPUT”VALUE OF Example only FR1
FR1,FR2,FR3,FR4”:FR1,FR2,FR3,FR4 =0, FR2 = 0.5, FR3
=0.7,FR4 =.9
1660 Z = FR1*H
1670 GOSUB 2860
1675 PRINT”Recquired area of steel at first
FR=”;AS1;”Square Inches per foot of
width”
1680 Z =FR2*H
1685 GOSUB 2860
1690 PRINT”Recquired area of steel at second
FR2=”;AS1;”Square Inch per foot of
width”
1700 Z=FR3*H
1705 GOSUB 2860
1710 PRINT”Recquired area of steel a5t a value
of FR4=”;AS1;”Square inch per foot of
wall”
1720 Z=FR4*H
1730 GOSUB 2860
270
1740 PRINT”Recquired area of steel at a value

of FR4=”ASI;”Square inch per foot”
1750 REM This is third alternative to find the
value of Y(cutting point at a distance from
the top)at a given AS a cubic equation
results
1755 REM Let AS3,AS4 & AS5 as given area of
steel reinforcements
1760 REM Let us DIM AS4 in three elements
1770 PRINT “Put numerical values of AS as data
statement”
1780 DIM AS4(3)
1790 FOR JX=1 TO 3
1800 READ AS4(JX)
1810 DATA Put numerical
values in
sequential order
1820 VX =1/500*KA*W1*LF 0.121716
1830 LX(JX) = FY*AS4(JX)/(20.4*FC) 1.1568
1890 UX(JX)=0.90*FY**AS4(JX) 63.72
2000 DT =TT-3.5 12.5 Inches
2010 DB = TB-3.5 19.5 Inches
2020 REM Let DA= Depth of stem at any
section from top
2030 DA = DB-DT 7 Inches
2040 A1X=VX
2050 B1X=0
2060 C1X(JX)=-DA*UX(JX)/H
2070 D1X(JX)= UX(JX)*LX(JX)-UX(JX)*DT 722..78888
2080 PRINT D1X(JX)
2090 NEXT JX
2100 PRINT”A1X=”;VX
271
2110 PRINT”A2X=VX
2120 PRINT”A3X=”;VX
2130 PRINT”B1X=”;B1X
2160 PRINT”C1X=”;C1X(1)
2170 PRINT”C2X=”;C1X(2)
2180 PRINT C3X=”;C3X(3)
2190 PRINT”D1X=”;D1X(1)
2200 PRINT ‘D2X=”;D1X(2)
2210 PRINT “D3X=”;D1X(3)
2220 PRINT” Above data’s are coefficients of
cubic equation. Copy coefficients for sub
routine no one then continue to resume
running”
2230 BREAK
2240 REM Format is A1X3 + B1X2 + C1X + D1 – 0
2250 DATA Note put
Coefficients of
AX1,B1X,C1X &
D1X
2260 DATA Note put
coefficients
A2X,B2X,C2X &
D2X
2270 DATA Note put
coefficients
A3X,B3X,C3X &
D3X
2280 RESTORE 2250
2290 GOSUB 2400
2300 PRINT “Location of y for first area of steel
272
is located at a distance =”Y;”Feet from top

of wall”
2310 RESTORE 2260
2320 GOSUB 2400
2330 PRINT “Location Y for second steel area is
located at a distance Y=”;”Feet from top”
2340 RESTORE 2270
2350 GOSUB 2400
2360 PRINT “Location Y for third area of steel is
located at a distance Y=;Y;”Feet from top
of wall”
2370 PRINT Programmed by Bienvenido C.
David a Civil/Structural Engineer on May3,
1984 in Baguio City”
2380 PRINT”Designed by Bienvenido C. David
2390 STOP
2400 REM A sub routine
2410 REM This is the general cubic equation
program no 1 finding the roots of a third
degree equation format is A1X3 + B1X2 +
C1X + D1 – 0
2420 READ A1,B1,C1,D1
2440 P = C- B^2/3
2450 Q = D - B*C/3+2*B^3/27
2460 R = P^3/27+Q^2/4
2470 IF R<0 THEN 2530
2480 Z = -Q/2+R^0.5
2490 IF Z<0 THEN 2520
2500 ZA = Z^.33333
2510 GOTO 2630
2520 ZB = ABS(Z)^.33333
2530 ZA = -ZB
273
2540 GOTO 2630

2550 O =ATN(ABS(R)^.5/(-Q/2))/3
2560 PI = 2.094395102
2570 ZC = ((-Q/2)^2-R)^.5
2580 ZA = (ZC)^.33333
2590 IF (-Q/2)>0 THEN 2620
2600 ZA = -ZA
2610 XA = COS(O+2*PI)*(ZA-P/(3*ZA))-(B/3)
2620 X = COS(O+PI)*(ZA-P/(3*ZA))-(B/3)
2630 XB = COS(O)* (ZA-P/(3*ZA))-(B/3)
2710 IF XA>0 THEN 2740
2720 IF X>0 THEN 2770
2730 IF XB>0 THEN 2800
2740 Y = XA
2743 DA = DT +Y/H*DC
2745 AS =12*PN*DA
AS=”AS:;”Square inches per foot length of
wall”
2755 RETURN
2760 STOP
2770 Y=X
2773 DA = DT + Y/H*DC
2775 AS = 12*PN*DA
AS=”;AS;”Square Inches per foot of wall”
2785 RETURN
2790 STOP
2800 Y = XB
2810 DA = DT+ Y/H*DC
2820 AS = 12*PN*DA
2830 PRINT” Required area of steel
274
AS=”;AS;’Square inches per foot of wall”

2840 RETURN
2850 STOP
2860 REM This is a sub routine no three
2870 REM Determination of steel
reinforcements for a value of y
2880 M = 1/6000*KA*W1*LF*Z^3
2885 D = Z/H*(T1-T2) + T2
2887 D1 = (D-3.5)
2890 IF (D1^2-2.61*M*12/(12*FC))<0 THEN
2895 ELSE 2905
2895 PRINT “Depth of stress rectangular block
is imaginary not possible review given
data of sub routine no two”
2900 STOP
2905 A = D1- SQR(D1^2-2.61*12/(12*FC))
2910 AS = 12*M/(0.90*FY*(D1-A/2))
2920 P = AS/(12*D1)
2930 PN = 0.2/FY
2940 IF P>=PN THEN 2960
2950 IF P<PN THEN 2980
2960 AS1 = AS
2970 GOTO 2990
2980 AS1 = 12*PN*D1
2990 AS1 = AS1
3000 RETURN
3010 END
275

Computerised Conceret Design by Engr. Ben David PDF

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Judul Asli

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Computerised Conceret Design by Engr. Ben David PDF

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

SYSTEMATIC DESIGN

Ma1 Mb1 Mc1 10 REM A three dim array

Ma2 Mb2 Mc2 20 DIM M(3,3,3) Computer Output

Ma3 Mb3 Mc3 30 FOR a = 1 to 5

Ma4 Mb4 Mc4 40 FOR b = 1 to 5

Ma5 Mb5 Mc5 50 FOR c = 1 to 5

Matrix Algebra Advance Basica

By:Bienvenido C. David – Civil Engineer

The author finished his Bachelor of Science in Civil Engineering in the

Year 1969. Year 1970 he was employed by Monark International as Instrument

This prompted him to write his book “Systematic Design of Reinforced

In 1988 He migrated to Australia and worked in the Work Cover Authority of

May this book serves an inspiration for the

Experienced based from my Civil Engineering practice Designing a typical six

EXCERPTS FROM THE FIRST EDETION

P.R.C. NO: 10170

Formerly Construction Engineer (Dam Aspect) Pantabangan Dam, National

Formerly feasibility Study Engineer - Low Cost Housing Development Project

Baguio City, Philippines – 1979 to 1980

Formerly Civil Engineering Practitioner – Baguio City, Philippines 1980 – 1987

Formerly held various positions RSL/SIM PLUS COMMUNICATION COMPANY

Australia 2001 – 2010

Formerly Customer Support Consultant OPTUS COMMUNICATION PTY LTD

Australia 2010 – 2012

Chapter 4 is all about design of beams and consist program no 7 Design of

Chapter 7 covers design of Reinforced Concrete column and made up of two

Experienced based from my Civil Engineering practice Designing a typical six

My close associations with competent Engineers & architects during my practice

but most of all I am indebted to my UC BCF mentors during my five years as a

The extensive computer experienced I gained from my two previous

Finally I want to thank my daughter Erikka David, a graduating Medical

The beautiful clients I met during my Civil Engineering practice in my hometown

This book is dedicated to my daughter Erikka David, to my fellow UC _BCF

May this book serves an inspiration for the undergraduates students of UC –

Bienvenido C. David – January 15, 2015 - Sydney -Australia

Sometimes Civil or particularly Structural Engineers

With the advent of microcomputers, programmable

August 30, 1984 Trancoville, Baguio City, Philippines

APPLIED MATHEMATICS APPLICATION TO

THE GENERAL CUBIC EQUATION INTRODUCTION

AND EXAMPLES Page 2 – 3

PROGRAM RECORD Page 4 - 7

NEWTON’S METHOD OF APPROXIMATION

INTRODUCTION, ANALYSIS AND EXAMPLES Page 8 - 9

PROGRAM RECORD PAGE 10 – 13

SIMULTANEOUS EQUATIONS IN MANY UNKNOWNS

INTRODUCTION, ANALYSIS AND EXAMPLES PAGE 11 – 17

PROGRAM RECORD PAGE 18 – 23

THE THREE MOMENT EQUATION INTRODUCTION PAGE 25 – 26

PROGRAM RECORD PAGE 27 – 39

THE SLOPE DEFLECTION METHOD INTRODUCTION PAGE 40 – 42

PROGRAM RECORD PAGE 43 – 55

THE MOMENT DISTRIBUTION METHOD

PRORAM RECORD PAGE 58 – 69

MECHANICS AND BEHAVIOUR OF

DESIGN OF REINFORCED CONCRETE BEAMS

SINGLE REINFORCED CONCRETE BEAM

PROGRAM RECORD Page 86 – 91

DOUBLE REINFORCED CONCRETE BEAM

INTRODUCTION, ANALYSIS AND FORMULA DERIVATIONS FOR

PROGRAM RECORD Page 95 – 101

DESIGN OF TEE BEAM

PROGRAM RECORD Page 106 – 114

55) Q = D – BC/3 + 2B^3/27 1666.9795

210) XA = COS (O + 2PI) (ZA – P/ (3*ZA)) – B/3)

220) X = COS (O+2PI)(ZA – P/ (3*ZA)) – B/3

230) XB = COS (O)(ZA – P)/(3ZA)) – B/3 11.7274